SHOP PRACTICES - Salomon Certification

SHOP PRACTICES 

& SPARE PARTS 

10/11

contentS 

2010/2011 Shop practiceS Manual 

Binding 1 

Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification 4 

Binding Quick Reference Chart 6 

retail Binding 

SySteMS 7 

Preparation 7 

Installation 8 

Binding-to-Boot Adjustments 14 

Release Value Selection & Adjustment 15 

Final Checking & Visual Inspection 17 

Mechanical Inspection 18 

Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 20 

rental & deMo Binding SySteMS 22 

Preparation 22 

Installation 23 

Binding-to-Boot AdJustments 24 

Release Value Selection & Adjustment 25 

Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection 25 

Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 29 

Binding Maintenance 

& repair 32 

Maintenance & Repair 32 

certification prograM 34 

Technician Certification Exam 34 

alpine SKi 38 

Technical Features 39 

Maintenance & Repairs 43 

Boot 47 

Standard Boot Norms 47 

Technical Features 48 

Salomon Foot Measurer 49 

Advanced Fit Technology Liner 50 

Custom Shell technology 52 

Salomon Boot Technologies 54 

Boot Concepts 55 

Foot Anatomy And Fit 63 

helMet & pole 66 

Helmet Technology 67 

Pole Technonolgy 69 

Spare partS 70 

Warranty 85 

The 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is published 

by Salomon for Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding 

Dealers. This manual provides current technical 

information, certification requirements, and indemnification 

information. Please keep a copy of this 

Manual on hand as a quick, easy, and reliable reference 

for servicing Salomon alpine bindings. Because 

the content of the Manual changes every year, you 

should keep previous editions available as references 

for servicing older products. Your Salomon 

Certification Web site will one day provide a resource 

of archived material for your reference as well. 

Salomon continues to be the number one winter 

sports brand worldwide. Our goal is to advance our 

breakthrough technologies featuring innovation in 

safety and performance binding systems. 

Cover Photo 

Photographer: Scott Markewitz. 

Skier: Rick Armstrong. 

Rev. 01 - 101007

Photo: Adam Clark. Skier: Cody Townsend Binding 

Binding 

Technical reference for the 

complete line of current 

Salomon alpine bindings

Binding 

2010/2011 certification prograM 

Salomon provides its Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers with information contained in this publication: 

1. To help assure skiers that Salomon alpine 

bindings are properly selected, mounted, 

adjusted, and serviced. 

authorized alpine dealer requirements 

While it is not necessary for an Authorized Location to have all of its 

personnel certified, sales people and managers are encouraged to remain 

aware of Salomon’s certification and record keeping requirements. 

• Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers must have at least one 

Salomon Certified Technician working at each Authorized Location selling, 

servicing or renting Salomon alpine bindings. 

• The technician who signs the Authorized Location’s workshop or rental 

form for any transaction must be currently Salomon alpine binding certified. 

• It is an Authorized Dealer’s responsibility to maintain sufficient records 

to identify its Certified Technicians. 

2010/2011 certification Kit 

This manual forms part of a kit which is available each year to Salomon 

Authorized Binding Dealers. Enclosed in the kit you will find the necessary 

materials to certify your shop technicians for mounting and adjusting 

Salomon Bindings for the 2010/2011 season. This packet should have the 

following items: 

• 2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices Manual & Spare Parts 

• 2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices CD (instructional video & manuals) 

• Skier Classification Chart 

• Visual Indicator Adjustment Chart 

• Toe Height Adjustment Card 

If this packet is missing any of these items, or you need any more, please 

contact Salomon Customer Service at 1 (800) 654-2668 (in the U.S.) or 

1 (800) 361-3398 (in Canada). 

electronic documentation 

An electronic version of the 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is 

available both on the media CD included with this Certification Kit 

as well as online at www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or 

www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada). The media CD PDF version of the 

manual is identical to the printed copy included in this kit, with the added 

convenience of a fully hyperlinked table of contents and reference boxes 

for easy navigation. The online PDF version of the Salomon Shop Practices 

Manual is continuously updated with the most current technical language 

and thus may have additions not appearing in the print version of the 

Salomon SPM. The printed version of the Salomon SPM is still completely 

valid and all procedures described within follow industry standards. 

2. To serve as a risk management tool for the 

Authorized Dealer. 

certification fees 

Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers will be invoiced an administrative registration 

fee for technician certifications. 

u.S. dealers 

• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for each Registration and Exam 

submitted on line at www.salomoncertification.com 

• The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/ Exam submitted by mail or 

fax to Salomon, or for technicians certified by any approved industry 

training program. 

Fax: (801) 334-4502 

Salomon Certification/Customer Service 

Salomon U.S.A. 

2030 Lincoln Ave. 

Ogden, UT 84401 

canadian dealers 

• For Canada, a $30.00 fee will be invoiced for each Certification Kit sent 

to the dealer. Technicians must Register and take the Exam on-line at 

www.salomonhookup.ca 

Media cd 

IntroductIon > 2 

The training video comes on a cross-platform CD-ROM 

(Windows, Mac & Linux) along with a fully indexed PDF 

of the Shop Practices Manual and several forms for 

convenient access, duplication and printing. 

To view the videos you’ll need a computer with 

any web browser with the Quicktime plug-in 

installed (if it is not already installed, your browser 

will provide a link to easily obtain the free software). 

In addition, to view the Shop Practices document and open the other forms 

you’ll need a pdf document reader such as the free adobe reader (available at 

http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html) 

Insert the CD into a computer, navigate to the top-level of the CD-ROM and double-click 

the “WelcoMe-BienVenue.html” file – this should open the file in your 

internet web browser. Alternately, with the disk in the computer, you can launch a 

new internet browser window, choose “Open” from the “File” menu of the browser 

and navigating to location of the file on the CD-ROM.

Binding 

2010/2011 Salomon certified technician certification process 

Only a technician sponsored by a Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer may be certified. Authorized Dealers can log onto 

www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada) to receive a current list of their Salomon 

Certified Technicians. To complete the technician certification process: 

1. Read this manual and become familiar with required Salomon shop 

practices. A corresponding CD is available to assist in this process. For 

a copy of the CD, contact your Salomon sales or Customer Satisfaction 

Representative. 

2. Be familiar with earlier editions of Salomon Shop Practices Manuals 

and Salomon Technical Updates. 

technician certification Validity period and transfer 

• Technician certification is valid for two years from the exam date 

(unless Salomon provides further notice). 

• Technician certification is not valid at a location that is not a 

Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Location. 

instructions for taking the on-line exam 

1. log onto the certification website 

• In the U.S. log onto www.salomoncertification.com 

• In Canada log onto www.salomonhookup.ca 

2. register your information 

• Once you have signed in, you will get a prompt asking you to confirm 

your login-ID. Write this information down in case you need to stop 

your test in the middle and return later. 

3. take the on-line exam 

• Once the test begins, do not use your web browser to move “back” 

or “forward”. Doing this will result in a cancelled session and you 

will need to start at the beginning. 

• A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. 

• In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and 

must be answered correctly. 

3. Be familiar with Salomon bindings through hands-on experience. 

4. For the U.S., log on to www.salomoncertification.com. For Canada, 

log on to www.salomonhookup.ca. Complete the on-line 2010/2011 

Salomon Certified Technician Registration and Exam and receive confirmation 

of your certification instantly. 

Once you have become familiar with the procedures for mounting, adjusting, and testing Salomon bindings, take the exam on-line for instant results 

and obtain your certificate immediately. (If for some reason you are unable to take the test on line, please contact your Salomon sales representative.) 

Just follow these easy steps: 

finding currently certified technicians for your Shop 

finding currently certified technicians is a service only available the u.S. 

1. Simply log onto the site and click on the button “Search for certified 

technicians”. 

2. Enter your shop ship-to code or certificate number to search the certification 

database. 

IntroductIon > 3 

2010/2011 certification prograM continued 

• Technician certification may be transferred from one 

Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer to another by 

contacting the certification coordinator by mail or telephone 

(Ogden, UT for U.S. dealers and Markham for Canadian dealers). 

4. once you pass the test 

• In the U.S. click on the button to create a printable certificate. (The 

certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do not have Acrobat 

Reader on your computer, click on the icon, and you can download it 

free from the web.) or Write down your certificate number and return 

later to retrieve your printable certificate. An invoice for $12 will be 

generated and sent to your shop. If you do not pass, your shop will 

not be invoiced. Only passing exams will receive certificate numbers 

and generate an invoice. 

• In Canada, click on the Download Certificate box to create a printable 

certificate. (The certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do 

not have Acrobat Reader on your computer, click on the icon and you 

can download it free from the web.) or click on e-mail Certificate to 

receive an e-mail version. 

3. You may retrieve printable certificates from the database for any certified 

tech. 

4. If you need to know who in your shop is certified, log on and search 

for certified technicians for your shop. An updated list will appear so 

you have constant access to the information.

Binding 

IndemnIfIcatIon > 4 

alpine Binding liaBility indeMnification 

Schedule of indemnified bindings 

Salomon alpine binding indemnification applies to the 2010/2011 Retail Binding Line, 2010/2011 Rental 

Binding Line, Non-current Retail Binding Line and Non-current Rental Binding Line models listed below. 

Indemnification does not apply to older non-indemnified binding models. 

non-indemnified Bindings 

Older models of Salomon bindings no longer on the Schedule of Indemnified Bindings may still be serviced, however Liability Indemnification will not 

be offered by Salomon for these models of bind ings. Dealers wishing to service these models of bindings can reduce their liability risk by requiring an 

additional waiver and release agreement and attaching it to the Workshop Form. Such waivers should be reviewed by a dealer’s own legal counsel to 

ensure compliance with applicable laws. 

Salomon bindings are not designed or tested for use with Mono Boards, therefore bindings mounted on Monoboards will not be indemnified. 

retail Binding line 

2010/2011 

STH 16 

STH 16 Steel 

STH 14 Driver 

STH 14 

STH 12 Oversized 

STH 12 Driver 

Z 14 

Z 12 

Z 12 Ti 

Z 11 

Z 10 

Z 10 Ti 

Z 10 Women 

Z 10 Ti Women 

L10 

L10 Jr 

L9 

L7 

T5 

rental Binding line 

2010/2011 

KR Z 12 

KR Z 11 

KR Z 10 

KR Z 10 W 

Z 12 SC 

Z 10 SC 

L 10 SC 

L 10 SR 

L 9 W SC 

L 7 SC 

L 7 SR 

T 5 SC 

T 5 SR 

non current 

C610 Cp 

C610 

C609 Ti 

C609 D+ 

C609 

C608 FIS 17 

C608 Cp 

C608 

C607 

C509 Dr+ 

C509 

C305 / C305 MINI 

Z 920 Lab 

Z 916 Lab 

Z 914 Lab 

N 920 Equipe Race 

N 916 Equipe Comp. 

S914 Axe+ 

S914 Lab 

non current 

S912 Ti SC 

S810 Ti SC 

712 e 2 

Cosmic S712 SC 

KRR 711 

711 SC 

710 e 2 

710 SC 

Cosmic S710 SR 

Cosmic S710 SC 

Cosmic S710 

Q700 SC 

S700 SR 

S700 SC Drive Plus 

S700 SC 

S914 FIS 26.3/20/17 

S914 FIS 

S914 Pe 2 

S914 

S914 FIS Pilot 

S914 Pilot 

914 F1S 20 

914 FIS 

914 

S912 Ti Pe 2 

S912 FIS 

S912 FIS 24 

S912 Ti 

S912 Ps 

S912 FIS Pilot 

S912 Ti Pilot 

S912 Ti SC Pilot 

S912 

S910 T FIS 26,3/24/20 

S910 T Ps 

Q7 SC 

Q7 SR 

ST610 e 2 

C609 SC 

609 SC 

609 SR 

C608 SR 

C608 SC 

608 SC 

C607 SC 

C607 SR 

607 SR 

Quadrax 6 SC 

C509 SR 

C509 SC 

Q500 SC Drive Plus 

S910 FIS 24 

S910 T 

S910 

S910 T Ps 

S910 T Axe+ 

S812 Pa 

S811 PS 

S810 Ti 

S810 Ti Axe+ 

S810 Cp 

S810 Ps 

S810 

S810 Ti Pilot 

S810 Pilot 

S810 Ti SC Pilot 

S810 Ti Ps 

S711 Ps 

S711 Pa 

S711 Cp 

711 

Q500 SC 

Q500 SR 

Quadrax 5 SR 

Q5 SR 

Snowtrip ST 410 

Q400 SR 

C305 SR 

305 SC 

305 SR 

S305 SC 

S305 Grom SC 

C305 Grom SR 

Q300 SC 

Q300 SR 

S300 SC 

Quadrax 3 SC 

S710 Cp 

S710 Ti 

S710 

S710 Pilot 

S710 SC Pilot 

S710 Ti Pilot 

S710 Ti Cp 2 

S710 Pa 

S710 DP 

S710 CP 2 

710 Smartrak Grip 

710 

C610 CP 2 

610 CP 

610 

609 D+ 

609 

S608 CP 

C608 CP 2 

608 

Quadrax 3 SR 

Q3 SC 

Q3 SR 

KRR Z 12 Ti 

KRR Z 12 

Z 12 Ti Smartrak 


Control 

Z 12 Ti SC 

KRR Z 10 

Z 10 Ti SC 

Z 10 Smartrak 

LZ 8 SC 

LZ 7 SR 

607 

C509 D+ 

S305 GROM 

C305 GROM 

C305 MINI GROM 

305 


Control 

STH 12 

Z 10 Smartrak Control 

Z 10 Ti Axe + 

Z 10 Ti 

Z 10 FIS 20 

LZ 9 

LZ 8 

LZ 7 

TZ 5 

KRR TZ 5 SC 

TZ 5 SR 

TZ 5 SC 

TZ 5 SC Junior Track

Binding 

IndemnIfIcatIon > 5 

alpine Binding liaBility indeMnification continued 

Salomon authorized dealers 

Salomon offers liability indemnification to Salomon Authorized Dealers. Salomon will to the extent and 

within the limits that insurance coverage is available defend and indemnify a Salomon Authorized Alpine 

Binding Dealer against liabilities from claims presented by any customer of the Authorized Dealer arising 

solely from the use of Salomon alpine bindings, provided: 

A. The dealer purchased the alpine bindings from Salomon. 

B. The dealer has received written notice of a claim involving alpine bindings. 

C. The claim alleges use of the alpine bindings resulted in injury. 

D. All Salomon recommendations, procedures and policies in effect at the 

time of the incident were followed, including, but not limited to, those 

contained in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual, Salomon Technical 

Update (if applicable), Salomon Purchaser Policies and Salomon 

General Terms & Conditions. 

E. The Certified Technician is of legal age. 

F. The dealer uses workshop and/or rental forms the same as, or equivalent 

to, Salomon forms with currently approved Liability Release 

Language. 

G. The dealer maintains proper and complete records for all Salomon 

bindings mounted and/or adjusted for a period of two years or the 

statute of limitations of the state or province, whichever is longer. 

legal claims 

1. Use your best efforts to determine the exact nature and details of the 

claim. 

2. Avoid expressing opinions concerning the claim. You may, to the 

extent that you have complied with all recommended procedures, 

indicate to the claimant or the claimant’s representative that recommended 

procedures for service and adjustment of the equipment were 

followed. 

3. Notify your insurance company. Salomon indemnification is not a substitute 

for liability insurance. 

H. The dealer provides written documentation of the technician’s employment 

and training (e.g., method of training, proof of certification, etc.). 

I. A copy of the properly completed workshop form or rental form, including 

a signed release, is submitted. 

J. A properly completed Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report, 

the same as or equivalent to the exemplary form displayed in this 

manual, is submitted. 

K. Any other helpful information such as a Ski Patrol Incident Report 

Form is submitted. 

L. The dealer notifies Salomon in writing within ten days of the date on 

which the dealer first receives written notice of the claim. 

M. The dealer cooperates fully in the investigation, litigation and/or settlement 

of the claim. 

Salomon may terminate indemnification, with respect to Salomon 

alpine bindings, upon providing written notice to the dealer. 

In the event a Salomon equipment user or anyone acting upon the equipment user’s behalf contacts the 

Authorized Dealer regarding a potential claim: 

4. Gather all information and documents required by Salomon listed in 

the Liability Indemnification section for that specific product and send 

the documents with a brief description of the incident to: 

u.S.a. 

Alpine Legal Claims 

Department, 

Salomon U.S.A., 

2030 Lincoln Ave., 

Ogden, UT 84401. 

canada 

Legal Claims Department 

Salomon Canada Sports 

2700 14th Ave Unit 1-4 

Markham, On L3R 0J1

Binding 

Binding QuicK reference chart 

retail 

À la carte ModelS 

Brakes 

N STH16 102972 R90/R100/R115/R130 

56 mm - 99 mm (Ref. #) 

Jig Ref. # 001156 

Jig Selecion 

(given ski width) 

70 mm - 116 mm (Ref. #) 

80 mm - 123 mm (Ref. #) 

Jig Ref. # 001157 

4.1 mm diameter 

(skis with metal) (Ref. #) 

Drill Bit Ref. # 000893 

Drill Bit Selection 

3.6 mm diameter 

(skis with no metal) (Ref. #) 

Drill Bit Ref. # 000892 

Drill Bit Length 

DIN Scale 

Height (mm) 

Skier Weight 

kg 

lbs 

Adj. 

Range 

Wing 

Adj. 

(mm) 

US Size 

Weight 1/2 pair (g) 

Micro Simultaneous 

Automatic 

Vertical Progressive Pivot 

SCP (Salomon Control Pedal) 

(E) Elastic pedal / (S) Stomp pedal 

Adult / Junior Norms 

Ski/Binding Interface 

6 

Ti Line 

High Lateral Transmission 

Removable Brake 

9.5 9-16 17.5 > 95 > 209 19 2.5 1161 S S A • • 

N STH14 Driver 110723 R90/R100/R115 9.5 6-14 17.5 58-130 127-286 19 2.5 1060 S S A • • 

N STH14 102975 R90/R100/R115/R130 9.5 6-14 17.5 58-130 127-286 19 2.5 1025 A V S A • • 

N STH12 Oversized 110601 R80/R90/R100/R115 9.5 4-12 17.5 42-120 92-264 19 2.5 1025 A V S A • • 

N L10 110604 B80 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 860 A E A • 

N L9 108044 B80 9.5 2,5-9 16.5 25-100 55-220 28 3.5 861 A E A • 

N Z14 110583 B75/B80 9.5 6-14 16.5 58-130 127-286 28 3.5 1050 A V • A • • 

N Z12 110599 B80/B90/B100 9.5 4-12 16.5 42-120 94-264 28 3.5 1050 A V • A • • 

N Z12 Ti 110453 B80/B90/B100 9.5 4-12 16.5 42-120 92-264 28 3.5 937 A V • A Ti • • 

N Z11 110602 B80/B90 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 28 3.5 970 A V • A • • 

N Z10 110603 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 970 A V • A • • 

N Z10 Ti W 892976 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 857 A V • A Ti • • 

Junior 

N L7 111617 / 111623 B80 001156 001157 

# 000813 

# 000814 

8.0 2-7,5 16.5 22-85 55-187 28 3.5 861 A E A&J • 

N T5 111639 / 111619 NS 784061 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 44 5.5 561 A E A&J • 

N T5 Juniortrack 111641 NS 247290 8.0 0,5-4,5 22 10-45max 22-100 104 13 681 A E A&J Junior Track • 

BindingS for SetS 

K Z14 120025 B75 

# 788403 

# 000893 

# 000892 

9.5 6-14 23 58-130 127-286 100 15 1370 A V • A Smartrak • • 

K Z12 108772 / 108785 B75/B80/B90 9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 120 15 1310 A V • A Smartrak • • 

K Z11 110671 B80 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 120 3.5 1305 A V • A Smartrak • • 

J Z11 120026 B75 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 120 3.5 1157 A V • A Smartrak • • 

K Z10 110672 / 110673 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Smartrak • • 

K Z10 Ti 102174 / 110677 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1030 A V • A Smartrak Ti • • 

J L10 110674 B80 

001156 

001157 

9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 950 A E A • 

J L9 102192 / 104442 B80 9.5 2,5-9 31.5 25-100 55-220 120 15 950 A E A • 

J L10 Jr 111300 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 80 10 950 A E A • 

rental 

SMartraK rental 

KR Z12 110605 B80/B90 9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 120 15 1310 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

KR Z11 110606 B80/B90 9.5 3,5-11 31.5 36-115 79-253 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

KR Z10 110607 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

KR Z10 W 110608 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

BindingS for SetS 

FR L10 SC 110676 B80 

FR L7 SC 111813 B80 

# 001003 

# 001040 

000893 000892 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 860 A E A Synchro-Center • 

# 000813 

# 000814 

8.0 2-7,5 31.5 22-85 55-187 122 15 860 A E A&J Synchro-Center • 

FR T5 SR 111622 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 56 7 572 A E A&J Synchro-Rental • 

FR T5 SC 111640 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 28 10-45max 22-100 86 11 810 A E A&J Synchro-Center • 

adult 

NR Z12 SC 110609 B80/B90/B100/B115 

# 001003 

# 001040 

# 000893 

# 000892 

9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 122 15 1386 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

NR Z10 SC 110610 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 1370 A V • A Synchro-Center • • 

NR L10 SC 110612 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 1100 A E A Synchro-Center • 

NR L10 SR 110613 B80 9.5 3-10 18 30-107 66-235 80 10 952 A E A Synchro-Rental • 

NR L9 W SC 107279 B80 9.5 2,5-9 31.5 25-100 55_220 122 15 861 A E A Synchro-Center • 

Junior 

NR L7 SC 111812 B80 

# 001003 

# 001040 

# 000813 

# 000814 

8.0 2-7,5 31.5 22-85 55-187 122 15 1100 A E A&J Synchro-Center • 

NR L7 SR 111618 B80 8.0 2-7,5 18 22-85max 55-187 80 10 958 A E A&J Synchro-Rental • 

NR T5 SR 111642 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 56 7 572 A E A&J Synchro-Rental • 

NR T5 SC 111643 NS 001003 8.0 0,5-4,5 28 10-45max 22-100 86 11 810 A E A&J Synchro-Center •

Photo: Dan Carr. Skier: Sammy Carlson. Binding 

retail Binding 

SySteMS 

reference 

page # Section Name 

18 Clean vs. Lubricated Test 

47 Standard Boot Sole 

Dimensions 

retaIl systems > 7 

Proper procedures for 

a Salomon Certified 

Technician to follow 

while mounting and 

adjusting Salomon 

Retail bindings. 

preparation 

Start out prepared with an efficient working area. Your bench should be the right height, with proper lighting, 

and with the necessary tools at hand. Familiarize yourself with all procedures before you start: being 

prepared is the best way to avoid errors and costly mistakes. It is important that all components match 

those listed on the workshop form. Refer to your workshop form and make sure the bindings are appropriate 

for the skier. If the bindings have been used, make sure they are in good condition and no parts are 

missing, broken, or showing signs of wear. 

Boot-to-Binding compatibility 

Before drilling the ski, be sure the 

boot you are using is compatible with 

the binding. Only boots that conform 

with applicable standards may be 

used with Salomon bindings. (See 

Standard Boot Sole dimensions 

on page 47 for reference). If a boot 

sole is warped, worn or improp erly 

canted, such that there is more than 

a 1 mm difference in sole flatness 

measured across its width, the boot 

is incompatible. 

other compatibility problems you 

May encounter 

• Cut-outs in the boot sole that 

prevent the brake from engaging 

properly. 

• Excessive ramping or wear of the 

boot sole at the point where it 

contacts the binding. Any wear that 

inhibits binding function is excessive. 

• Tread, grid pattern or insignia 

present in the AFD area of the boot 

sole. This area must be flat over its 

entire surface. 

• Non-compatible boot sole composition. 

Low-grade thermoplastic 

(T.P.) boots may not be used with 

Salomon bindings. If you are uncertain 

as to the quality of the boot 

sole material, perform the clean 

vs. lubricated test as described 

on page 19. 

Only adult norm boots may be used 

with adult bindings. Under no circumstances 

should a junior norm 

boot ever be used with an adult binding. 

Salomon bindings that can be 

used with both junior and adult norm 

boot soles are: TZ5, S305, C305, 

Q300, S300, their mini equivalents, 

earlier model indemnified equivalents, 

and their various counter parts. 

(The added width of an adult norm 

boot sole somewhat limits the shock 

absorption capability of these models 

and they should not be used with a 

boot sole longer than 304 mm. As 

a result, it is recommended that an 

aggressive junior skier with an adult 

norm boot sole use a model designed 

exclusively for adult norm boots.) 

A Salomon toe or heel may not be 

mounted with another manufacturer’s 

toe or heel. Indemnification and warranty 

are automatically voided for 

such mixed systems. 

For Rental specific preparation instructions, 

please refer to page 22. 

Junior Boot to Binding compatibility chart 

Junior 

Boot Junior 

Boot Models norms Bindings only 

Falcon 100 Adult 

Course 90 Adult 



Falcon 60 Junior X 

Performa T3 Adult 

Performa T2 Junior X 

15 Mini Junior X 

Performa T3 Rental Adult 

Performa T2 Rental Junior X 

iMportant: 

Salomon bindings that can 

be used with both junior 

and adult norm boot soles 

are: tZ5, S305, c305, Q300, 

S300, their mini equivalents, 

earlier model indemnified 

equivalents, and their various 

counter parts. 

Step 1

Step 2 

Binding 

inStallation 

Jig Selection & use 

retaIl systems > PreParatIon > 8 

Salomon bindings are installed 3 ways. “À la carte” bindings are installed by drilling holes into the surface 

of the ski with the aid of a Salomon jig. Pilot Systems require no jigs and are simply secured to pre-drilled 

holes on a premounted Salomon interface. Smartrak Systems can require a combination of these two techniques. 

Please refer to the specific instructions in this Manual. 

legend 

A Handle with Self-Centering Clamps 

S Toe Guide 

D Tip-of-Boot Sole Indicator 

F Locking Lever 

G Mid-Sole Indicator 

H Boot Size Indicator 

J Drill Bit Bushing 

K Self-Centering Guide for Heel of Boot 

ref. # Jig Jig range application 

retail JigS 

788403 Smartrak 70mm - 116mm Smartrak binding systems only 

001156 Adult Retail 56mm - 99mm 

STH 16, STH 14, STH 12, STH 14 Driver, Z14, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12++, Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti, Z10 Tiw, 710, 610 CP, 

610, 609 D+, 609 Ti, 609, 608, L 8, L 9; Drill bit length 8 mm: 607, L 7 

001157 Wide Adult Retail 80mm - 123mm (Same as above) 

78406101 Junior Retail 

rental JigS 

56mm - 99 mm 305 and 305 Mini, TZ 5 

001003 

Synchro Center & Synchro 

Rental/ Senior Junior 

56mm - 99mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak) 

001040 

Wide Synchro Center & 

Synchro Rental/ Senior Junior 

80mm - 123mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak) 

24729001 TZ 5 Juniortrak Rental 56mm - 99mm TZ 5 Juniortrak bindings only 

* Contact your customer service representative for additional jigs. 

Jig use (10 Steps) 

A jig ensures that all holes for binding mounting are drilled in the correct location. The bushings guide the 

drill bit so that it remains perpendicular to the ski. 

A S Correct Incorrect 

1. Select the proper jig for the 

binding model to be mounted 

by referencing the Jig 

Reference Guide. 

2. check the skis’ serial number 

to ensure you are mounting a 

matched pair. Place the skis on 

the workbench with the ski tips 

pointed to your left. 

3. open the jig by twisting both 

handles inward. Place the jig on 

the ski. 

4. open the locking lever. 

5. extend the jig to accept the 

boot. 

6. place the toe of the boot sole 

against the toe guide. Twist the 

A 

S D 

rear handle to open the rear 

clamps and slide the heel guide 

snugly against the boot heel. 

fig. A 

7. close the locking lever. 

(Compare the mid-sole mark 

on the boot with the mid-sole 

indicator on the jig. If the midsole 

mark on the boot and the 

mid-sole indicator on the jig 

do not agree, use the mid-sole 

mark on the boot. This requires 

leaving the boot in the jig to 

position it on the ski.) 

8. position the jig on the ski. 

fig. S 

F 

G 

H J K 

a. If the ski has a mid-sole mark, 

align the mid-sole mark on the 

boot with the mid-sole mark on 

the ski. 

b. If the ski has a tip-of-boot 

mark, align the tip-of-boot sole 

indicator on the jig with the tipof-boot 

mark on the ski. 

c. If the ski has no visible markings 

for jig location, consult 

the ski manu facturer for proper 

mounting position. 

9. once the jig is in position, 

release the handles simultaneously 

and the jig will center 

itself on the ski. 

10. re-check your work. The 

ski is now ready to be drilled. 

(Customers may request that 

specific mounting instructions be 

followed. This is particularly true 

for skiers who want to initiate 

turns more easily. Make a note 

on the Workshop Form of any of 

these special instructions.) 

reference 


10 4-Hole Toe / Spheric 

Oversize 

10 3-Hole Toe / Spheric Sport 

& Quadrax 

23 SC System Demo 

23 SR System Rental & Demo

Binding 

inStallation > Drilling, Tapping and Glue 

drilling, tapping & glue 

drilling 

A 

tapping 

A 

glue 

Mounting 

correct incorrect 

For drilling and tapping Salomon skis, 

please refer to drill Bit Selection for 

Salomon Skis (page 40). For other 

skis, follow the recommendations of 

the ski manufacturer. In their absence, 

Salomon suggests that you use the 

Salomon drill Bit Selection guide 

(below). When in doubt about the ski’s 

core composition, select a 3.6 mm 

diameter bit and drill one hole. If the 

bit comes in contact with any metal, 

re-drill with a 4.1 mm bit to ensure 

proper screw retention. exceptions: 

for Equipe T, XW Fury Junior, Jade 

Salomon drill Bit Selection guide 

Skis diameter length ref. aspect 

Junior 

adult 

4.1 mm 

(ski with metal) 

3.6 mm 

(ski with no metal) 

4.1 mm 

(ski with metal) 

3.6 mm 

(ski with no metal) 

diameter 

8 mm 

8 mm 

9.5 mm 

9.5 mm 

length 

000813 

1 x 5 

000814 

1 x 5 

000893 

1 x 5 

000892 

1 x 5 

glue must be used when inserting binding screws to: 

• Lubricate the screw during insertion. 

• Create a watertight seal. 

• Ensure that the screws will hold 

while the ski is in use by acting as a 

dampener. 

retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 9 

Junior, Teneighty Fish, and Teneighty 

Kitten skis, drill using either a 3,6 mm 

diameter drill bit (for skis under 

140 cm) or a 4,1 mm diameter drill 

bit for skis greater than or equal to 

140 cm. Neither tap nor glue. Use a 

hand screwdriver only (3 Nm torque) 

to tighten the screws on the bindings. 

Drill through the jig’s proper bushings 

applying moderate downward 

pressure on the drill. Verify that the 

counter sink bevel on the drill bit has 

properly de-burred the hole. fig. A 

After drilling, turn the ski over and hit 

Tap all binding mounting holes 

unless otherwise recommended 

by the ski manufacturer. Failing 

to tap when necessary can result 

in topskin delamination, sidewall 

delamination, broken screws or 

damage to the ski core. 

The tap should be mounted into 

a brace. Position the brace so the 

Place a drop of glue on the surface 

of each hole. As the screw passes 

through the glue it coats itself. 

caution: Salomon strongly recommends 

its own glue for Salomon skis. 

A Posidrive No. 3 screwdriver, not a Phillips, is used to mount Salomon 

bindings. Consult the Salomon Spare parts catalog (page 70) for reference 

on the Salomon screws. They are available through your customer 

service representative. 

S 

the base several times with the palm of 

your hand to remove any debris from 

the drilled holes. 

When mounting thin skis or junior skis 

with adult bindings you may need to 

use shorter screws or add washers to 

the existing screws between the binding 

and the ski to prevent damaging 

the ski base. Before drilling any junior 

ski, check the screw depth by positioning 

the binding over the mounting area 

so that the binding screws on one side 

of the heel track appear alongside the 

ski sidewall. fig. S 

Special cases When drilling 

Junior Skis 

• Use a 9.5 mm length drill bit 

when mounting Z10 Ti, Z10 Ti SC, 

Z10 SC, Z10, Z10 Fis 20, 710, 

710 SC, 610, 609, 609 SR, 609 SC, 

608, 608 SC, L 7 SC, L 8, L 8 SC 

bindings. These models use the 

same screws as the Salomon adult 

models and should be drilled and 

tapped accordingly. 

• As a general rule, the S910 Team is 

mounted on skis 170 cm or longer 

and the S608 or C608 on skis 

tap goes straight into the drilled 

hole. fig. A Apply only enough 

pressure to the brace to start the 

tap, as the tap is a self-cutting 

tool. 

A ski mounting plate is usually 

no more than 8 mm below the 

topskin. Tapping any deeper than 

8 mm can strip the hole or break 

140–170 cm. The S608 or C608 can 

also be used with skis 120–140 cm. 

The S305 Grom and C305 Grom 

are generally used with skis 80-140 

cm*. The shorter the ski, the more 

likely washers will be necessary to 

avoid dimpling the ski base. 

• The new Salomon C607 junior accommodates 

adult norm boot soles 

and offers a 2 to 7 DIN scale. This 

new intermediate binding for 5 to 

10-year-olds features shorter 6 mm 

screws for use on junior skis as 

short as 120 cm. 

• Whenever junior bindings are 

mounted on adult skis, an increased 

possibility exists of binding pull-out 

due to poor screw reten tion. The 

penetration depth of junior screws 

into the ski core is only 7 mm. If 

neces sary, use adult drill bits and 

screws to penetrate any mounting 

platform. 

• The hole must be deep enough to 

accommodate the screw length you 

are using or ski damage may result. 

* eXception: S305’s and C305’s cannot 

be mounted on the Crossmax 10 

Team or XScream 10 Team models 

manufactured from 2001 to 2003 

inclusively. Both bindings may be 

mounted on the 2004-2005 models 

of the Crossmax 10T and Crossmax 

T, 2006/2007 models of the X Wing T, 

and 2007/2008 X Wing Fury Junior 

and Jade Junior. 

the tap. Each full turn of the brace 

cuts the tap approximately 2 mm 

into the ski. After tapping, turn the 

ski over and hit the base several 

times with the palm of your hand 

to remove shavings from the hole. 

reference 


8 Jig Selection & Use 

10 Retail Mounting 

23 Rental & Demo Mounting 

partS (see page 70) 

reference # Item Name 

000821 Blue Plastic Plugs 

000818 Black Plastic Plugs 

000819 White Plastic Plugs 

000822 Grey Plastic Plugs 

000820 Red Plastic Plugs 

000823 Orange Plastic Plugs 

000870 Green Plastic Plugs 

000816 Taps 

000817 Tap Brace 

000811 Glue 

000862 Posidrive Screwdriver 

B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit 

Step 2

Step 2 

Binding 

inStallation > General Retail Installation 

general retail Mounting 

A 

toe piece 

S D F 

4-hole toe inStallation 

performance/Spheric oversize 

A long bit is needed (Posidrive 

Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for 

power drills and Salomon Manual 

Screwdriver Ref. #000862) to 

mount the 4-hole pattern toes as 

the front two screws must be inserted 

through the binding housing. 

fig. S 

heel piece Ski Brake 

heel piece inStallation 

G H 

legend 

Heel Track 

Heel Housing 

Heel Lever 

Heel Cup 

Treadle 

Brake Pedal 

Pressure 

Distributors 

* Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track. 

Spheric Pedal/ 

AFD 

Toe Cup 


All Salomon bindings feature 

the E-Z Mount System with the 

screws already in place. Position 

the component over the prepared 

holes to begin installation 

(fig. A). If a power screwdriver 

is used, adjust the clutch for the 

appropriate ski core construc- 

Use a crisscross screwing pattern 

and insert each screw until nearly 

seated. fig. D Do not tighten 

until all the screws are in place. 

The baseplate of the AFD should 

be flush with the topskin of the ski 

and each screw should be flush 

with the baseplate of the toe piece. 

This procedure applies for all toe 

pieces with a four-hole pattern. 

Z12 Ti 

S912 Ti 

Toe Height 

Adjustment Screw 

Visual Indicator 

Housing 

tion. Hand check each screw after 

mounting. 

Toe Installation differs for 4-hole toe and 3-hole toe bindings. The former requires a criss-cross screwing pattern while the latter starts with a center 

mounting hole sliding track beneath the front of the toe. 

Place the heel over the prepared 

holes and insert the screws using 

a crisscross screwing pattern. (Do 

not compress the ski brake before 

it is mounted on the ski.) fig. G 

do not over tighten. 

3-hole toe inStallation 

Z-concept bindings, Spheric 

Sport and Quadrax 

For models with a 3-hole pattern, 

first pull the center mounting hole 

sliding track out from the binding far 

enough to insert the screw into the 

ski. A long bit is needed (Posidrive 

Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for 

power drills and Salomon Manual 

Screwdriver Ref. #000862) fig. F 

Adjustment 

Screw 

Baseplate 

Brake Arm 

Sliding Center 

Mounting Hole 

Lubrication 

Point* 

tighten the screw until it is firmly 

seated. Next, slide the toe piece towards 

the seated center screw until 

the two rear screws align with their 

respective holes. 

tighten the rear screws until they 

are firmly seated. The base plate 

should be flush with the topskin of 

the ski and the head of each screw 

should be flush with the baseplate. 

SKi BraKe inStallation 

Do not compress the ski brake 

before installing it. Place the two 

metal tabs on the front of the 

brake into the slots in the heel 

base plate fig. H. Rotate the rear 

of the brake downwards to start 

the screw in the track. Tighten 

screws with a hand screwdriver 

(4 Nm maximum). 

note: The brake can be removed to 

facilitate ski maintenance. 

to remove it: turn the center screw 

counterclockwise and remove 

the brake. 

reference 


9 Drilling, Tapping & Glue 

14 Binding-to-Boot 

Adjustments 

23 SC System Demo 

23 SR System Rental & Demo 

32 Maintenance and Repairs 



000905 Salomon Grease 

000862 Posidrive Screwdriver 

B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit

Binding 

inStallation > Model-specific Installation 

Smartrak System 

Smartrak interface Mounting 


A S D F 

Smartrak System installation 

There are two different mounting procedures for the Smartrack interface, based on the system type. 

Smartrack grip & grip plus (fixed 

toe systems): 

insert metal band into the recessed 

slots in the plate. fig. A 

determine sole length in mm of 

boot. 

identify the letter on the metal 

band that corresponds to the boot 

sole length. If the boot sole length 

is between two numbers, choose 

the higher number.e.g.: For a boot 

sole of 320mm, choose setting 

“334mm D”. 

Screw the center mounting sliding 

track into the correspondingly 

lettered hole at the front of the 

Smartrak plate. fig. S 

finish mounting the three hole toe 

as usual. 

The Smartrak interface is available 

for use with flat skis. 

position the Smartrak metal jig 

(ref# 788403) so center mark on 

Wide Ski installation 

install the heel unit by lifting the 

tab located just in front of the heel 

piece and sliding the heel assembly 

onto the Smartrak plate. fig. F 

attach the brake in the usual 

manner. 

position the boot against the toe 

piece and slide the heel forward until 

it contacts the boot. Make sure 

the heel piece “clicks” and locks 

into position on the track. 

push the boot into the system and 

verify the forward pressure.Once 

the forward pressure is correct, the 

number on the metal band directly 

in front of the heel provides a 

guide to the quick positioning of 

the second heel. 

jig aligns with center mark of ski. 

When installing a Smartrak plate 

make sure the recessed slots at the 

front of the interface are positioned 

towards the tip of ski 

Smartrak control, response, and 

prolink (adjustable toe systems): 

insert the metal band into the 

recessed slots in center of plate. 

fig. A 

determine the sole length of boot 

to being used. 

lift the tab behind the AFD on the 

toe piece and slide the toe piece 

from the rear of track to the front 

until the boot sole length number 

on the metal band corresponds 

to, or is slightly greater than, the 

sole length of the boot being used. 

For example: a boot sole length 

of 306mm would require that you 

chose a setting on the band of 

308mm. Make sure the toe piece 

“clicks” and locks into position on 

the track. fig. D 

proceed with drilling, taping, and 

gluing as described on page 9. 

install the heel piece by lifting the 

tab located just in front of the heel 

piece and sliding the heel assembly 

onto the Smartrak plate until 

the boot sole length number on the 

metal band corresponds to, or is 

slightly greater than, the sole length 

of the boot being used. For example: 

a boot sole length of 306mm 

would require that you chose a setting 

on band of 308mm. Make sure 

the heel piece “clicks” and locks 

into position on the track. fig. F 

install the break in the normal 

manner and proceed with binding 

to boot adjustments as described 

on page 14 or page 24. 

assemble Smartrak binding following 

instruction as explained above 

in Smartrak System installation. 

A S Wide Ski Brakes 

a 

Wide Ski Jigs are available from 

Salomon to mount bindings on 

wide skis. Select the proper jig for 

the binding to be mounted by referencing 

the Jig Selection chart. 

Reversible pads adapt fat ski jigs to 

different widths of skis. The pads 

are changed by pulling them off 

b 

the jig and repositioning them to 

achieve the desired width. fig. A 

the pads are properly positioned 

when they touch the jig shoulder. 

• 98-124 mm skis: Thin sides of 

the reversible pads are positioned 

to the inside of the ski. fig. Sa 

• 80-106 mm skis: Wide sides of 

the reversible pads are positioned 

to the inside of the ski. fig. Sb 

Refer to the Wide Ski Brakes chart 

(right). The proper width fat ski 

brake must be installed for each 

specific system or indemnification 

for that system will not apply. 

Ski 

Width 

(mm) 

1999 to 

Current Bindings 

(except LAB & 

STH)* 

Performance 

Ref. # 

Leasure 

(Quadrax) 

Ref. # 

2007 to 

Current 

(LAB & 

STH)* 

Freeskiing 

Ref. # 

80 78574801 78574801 78575501 

85 

78145901 

78574901 

90 78575001 78575701 

100 78575101 78575801 

115 78575201 78575901 

130 78830601 78855701 

*See Spare Parts (page 70) for full details. 

Step 2

Step 2 

Binding 


inStallation > Model-specific Installation (continued) 

lightrak plate 

A S 

D F 

Mounting and adjusting 

open and set the blade in straight 

position and place it on the plate 

with a rotational motion. fig. A. 

identify the length of the boot sole. 

Mount the toe piece: 

identify the letter that corresponds 

the sole length and screw the toe 

piece (if you are between two letters, 

choose the higher one). 

Steeringplate interface 

Jig use With extra large Boot Soles 

occasionally a boot sole is too 

large to fit a jig. in this instance, 

the following procedure should 

be used to allow correct mounting 

of the binding: 

1. Open the jig to its fully extended 

position. 

2. Place the boot heel into the jig 

against the heel guide. 

Mount the heel piece: 

Slide the heel piece on the interface 

from the rear using the manual lock 

to authorize the gliding. fig. S. 

Mount the brake following the 

usual procedure. fig. D. 

position the boot in the toe and 

slide the heel until it touches the 

boot. 

Compatible with quadrax and Z binding. 

Mounting: according to the boot sole 

length selected, tighten the screws 

competition Bindings > intended use 

Salomon distributes competition 

bindings to racers and coaches. 

These bindings are intended to be 

used by skiers with special reten- 

3. Measure the length of the sole 

that extends over the toe arrow 

(viewed from the underside) of 

the jig. 

4. Divide this length in half (measurement 

A). 

5. Place the fully extended jig onto 

the ski with the boot mid-sole 

mark aligned with the mid-sole 

mark on the ski. 

tion needs. If these bindings are 

used by recreational skiers, there 

is a far greater risk of injury due to 

the use of more powerful springs. 

Step in the boot and check forward 

pressure, the arrow on the lock 

must be within the scribed area. 

fig. F. 

note: the rear number on the blade 

is an indication for a quick adjustment 

of the second ski. 

on the toe and heel pieces (4Nm 

torque) in the corresponding position 

on interface: 

253-281mm 273-301mm 

293-321mm 313-341mm 

6. Move the jig forward of the 

mid-sole the same distance as 

measurement A and drill the toe 

holes. 

7. Re-align the jig’s mid-sole mark 

to the ski’s mid-sole mark. 

Move the jig backwards from 

the mid-sole mark the same 

distance as measurement A and 

drill the heel holes. 

Refer to requested Settings for 

instructions for skiers requesting 

settings not recommended by 

Salomon. 

333-361mm 353-381mm 

Mount the brake following the usual 

procedure. 

8. Install the bindings. (Verify that 

screw penetration will not exceed 

hole depth.)

Binding 


inStallation > Model-specific Installation (continued) 

laB Binding installation 

installation of the Z14 laB, 914 laB, 916 laB, 920 laB bindings 

Warning: the 914 laB, 916 laB, and 920 laB are the only bindings that should be installed on the ZZ interface 

A S D F 

G H 

assembly 

Measure boot sole length in mm and 

then break the yellow plastic blade 

spacer (fig. A) at the appropriate 

length (the resulting spacer should 

include the last tab which matches 

the boot length). 

Mounting 

To begin mounting any LAB binding 

model onto any interface except the 

ZZ Speed 2 see the note below then 

procede to next step. To mount 

onto the ZZ Speed 2 interface, 

select a ski with the correct size 

ZZ interface plate (S, M, or L) for 

the boot sole length by referring to 

the ZZ Speed 2 installation chart. 

Align the binding assembly on the 

adjustment 

place boot into binding system 

and adjust the toe as usual. 

check the forward pressure: With 

the boot in the binding (closed posi- 

note 

Slide the yellow blade spacer onto the 

metal blade until it rests against the 

black base plate. Make sure the metal 

blade is properly seated in spacer. 

insert the end of the blade spacer 

into the recessed area on the bottom 

of the toe piece base plate. fig. S 

ZZ interface using the screw position 

number code (1 or 2) found in 

the ZZ Speed 2 installation chart. 

fig. F 

tighten the toe screws in a crisscross 

pattern. 

Verify that the heel track is positioned 

correctly. The end of the 

metal blade should be 3 mm for- 

tion), adjust the forward pressure to 

align the top of the head screw with 

the back of the heel track. fig. H 

insert the post of the metal blade 

lock plate between the rear two 

screws of the toe piece. Press 

firmly into place. fig. D 

Lifter shims are an option on all 

LAB models except the Z14 LAB. 

If required, attach the appropri- 

ward of the end of the stainless 

steel heel track. fig. G 

tighten the heel screws in a crisscross 

pattern. 

Verify that the height suits FIS 

norm limits (50-55 mm). 

install the brake. 

Installing any LAB binding model onto any interface except the ZZ Speed 2 requires a slightly different approach to assembly 

and mounting. assembly: the yellow plastic blade spacer has letter codes corresponding to the boot sole length and must be 

broken at the appropriate tab. Make a note of this letter. The rest of the assembly is the same. Mounting begins by aligning the 

binding assembly’s center mark (arrow on the yellow blade spacer) to the corresponding letter code on the interface before 

tightening the toe screws and continuing with the rest of the mounting and adjustment as with current models. 

ate lifter shim, (yellow = 2 mm, 

black = 1 mm). do not add more 

than 5 mm of lifters. 

ZZ Speed 2 Installation 

Boot sole Size Screw Position 

length 

(mm) 

Letter 

Code 1 2 

265-297 S 265-282 283-297 

298-327 M 298-311 312-327 

328-343 L (N/A) 328-343 

reference 




15 Release Value Selection & 

Adjustment 

15 Requested Settings 



000902 Salomon Adjustment Tool 

001023 Adult Binding Paper Jig 

001056 Salomon Powder Option 

887528 Poweraxe Paper Jig 

Step 2

Step 3 

Binding 

Binding-to-Boot adJuStMentS 

adjusting 

heel position / forward pressure 

all forward pressure adjustments should be verified with the boot in the binding. 

A 

adjustment tab Models. 

(All current retail models) Check 

that the tip of the boot sole is 

flush against the butt plate of 

the toe piece (or central roller of 

applicable models). The forward 

pressure is correct when the arrow 

on the adjustment tab lines 

up within the scribed area at the 

end of the heel housing fig. A or 

when the arrow of the rear of the 

heel housing lines up within the 

toe cup Width 

G H J 

correct 

independent Wing 

adjustment Models. 

The adjustment screws for models 

with independent wing adjustments 

are located on each side of 

the toe piece. Adjust each wing 

snugly against the boot sole so 

that the boot is centered over the 

ski. fig. G do not over tighten 

fig. H as it forces the boot backward, 

increasing the forward pressure. 

When properly adjusted, the 

toe height 

K 

retaIl systems > adjustment > 14 

S D 

F 

scribed area on the adjustment 

tab. fig. S 2009/2010 models 

no longer have embossed arrows 

on the adjustment tab. The back 

edge of the tab should be used 

instead. fig. D If this adjustment 

is incorrect, remove the boot from 

the binding, lift the adjustment tab 

using a Salomon Adjustment Tool 

and slide the heel to the desired 

position. fig. F Re-insert the 

boot and check the adjustment. 

incorrect 

toe contacts the boot sole at three 

points: the butt plate and the low 

friction inserts in each wing arm. 

Simultaneous Wing 


(916, S914, S912, S810, S850 

Models and their predecessors). The 

adjustment screw for models with 

simultaneous wing adjustments is 

located on the left of the toe piece. 

fig. J By turning this screw, both 

toe wings adjust 

All Salomon retail binding models 

must have a clearance of 0-0.5 

mm between the AFD and boot 

toe. fig. K 

automatic Wing 


Toe height adjusts automatically 

on all current automatic wing 

adjustment binding models (Z14 

to TZ 5). 

Micro Metric heel adjustment 

for the Sth 16 and 12. 

With the boot in the binding (closed 

position), adjust the forward pressure 

to align the top of the screw 

head with the back of the heel track. 

fig. G 

simultaneously. Adjust the wings 

snugly against the boot sole. do not 

over tighten. The toe cup adjustment 

is correct when there are three 

points of contact: the butt plate 

and the low friction inserts on each 

wing arm. 

automatic Wing 


Spheric Sport and Quadrax model 

toe wings adjust automatically. The 

C305 adjusts automatically to ac- 

Manual Models. 

Currently only the 914 binding 

model features manual toe 

height adjustment. Raise the toe 

by turning the adjustment screw, 

located on top of the toe piece, 

counterclockwise. Pull the boot 

back to create a gap between the 

boot sole and the binding AFD. 

Adjust the toe height to create a 

gap of not more than 0.5 mm or 

until the boot sole just touches the 

G 

cept either children’s or adult norm 

boots. (The added width of an adult 

norm boot sole somewhat limits the 

shock absorption capability of the 

C305. It is suggested that aggressive 

junior skiers with an adult norm 

boot sole use a model designed exclusively 

for adult norm boots.) 

AFD. You can use a Salomon 0.5 

mm toe height adjust ment card to 

gauge this clearance. do not over 

tighten. (Always re-check the 

forward pressure adjustment after 

making any toe cup adjustments.) 

reference 



Adjustment 

33 AFD Replacement

Binding 

What type of skier are you? 

determining your SKier type is 

your responsibility! Your skier 

type, height, weight, age and ski 

boot sole length are used by the 

shop to determine the visual indicator 

settings of your ski bindings. 

Be sure to provide accurate information, 

as any error may increase 

your risk of injury. Consult these 

descriptions to select your classification: 

Skiers requesting Settings not recommended by Salomon 

The 2010/2011 Salomon adjustment chart is the only release adjustment 

chart authorized for use by Salomon dealers during the 2010/2011 season. 

Salomon recognizes a skier’s right to choose settings outside those 

recommended as per the current Salomon Adjustment Chart (particularly 

when the skier’s preferred setting is also within the range of acceptable 

settings). 

If the skier requests a setting other than the one derived from the current 

Salomon Adjustment Chart, the shop may: 

• Adjust the system to individual requests IF the technician notes on 

the workshop or rental form the reason the higher or lower setting 

was requested. The customer must verify the request for the higher or 

lower settings by signing and dating the form by the noted reason of 

the setting request. (It is suggested that the shop have the skier sign a 

release identical to the release agreement printed on this page. The 

release must then be attached to the completed workshop or rental 

form.) NOTE: Current Salomon workshop and rental forms include a 

"Requested Settings" option for customer requested settings, which 

eliminates the need for a separate release in such instances. 

• Adjust the system to the setting derived from the Salomon Adjustment 

Chart and instruct the skier on how to change the setting. 

retaIl systems > release value > 15 

releaSe Value Selection & adJuStMent 

determining Skier type 

It is the skier’s responsibility to determine Skier 

Type. Skier Type is not the same as skier ability 

and the two should not be confused. Skier Type 

must be indicated on the workshop form or rental 

form by the skier. The Skier classification chart 

is available in small and large poster size versions 

from Salomon and should be displayed to assist 

customers in classifying themselves. 

requested Settings 

These descriptions are compatible with ASTM and ISO documents. 

type 1 “cautious skiing at 

loWer visual indicator settings” 

• Prefer slow to moderate speeds. 

• Prefer gentle to moderate terrain. 

• Receive lower than average visual 

indicator settings. This may 

increase the risk of inadvertent 

binding release in order to increase 

the likelihood of release 

in a fall. 

• Type 1 settings apply to “entrylevel 

skiers uncertain of their 

classification”. 

type 2 “Moderate skiing at 

aVerage visual indicator settings” 

• Prefer a variety of speeds. 

• Prefer varied terrain. 

• Type 2 skiers are skiers who do 

not meet all the descriptions of 

Type 1 or Type 3 skier types. 

release agreement 

i, 

hereby acknowledge that I have been advised by the 

type 3 “aggressive skiing at 

higher visual indicator settings” 

• Prefer fast speeds. 

• Prefer steep terrain. 

• Receive higher than average visual 

indicator settings. This may 

reduce the likelihood of release 

in a fall in order to decrease the 

risk of inadvertent binding release. 

If from experience, you have been 

dissatisfied with visual indicator 

settings resulting from your selected 

skier type classification, you 

may wish to consider: (a) changing 

your skier type classification; 

(b) selecting different skier type 

classifications for toe and heel 

components; (c) selecting skier 

Types -1 ("for skiers who desire 

visual indicator settings lower than 

settings for a Type 1 skier") or 3+ 

("for skiers who desire visual indicator 

settings higher than settings 

for a Type 3 skier"). 

(rental shop, sales department, etc.) that the setting which I have 

requested for my bindings (Model ) 

is not the setting recommended by the manufacturer of the bindings for 

a skier of my height, weight, age and skier type. I understand that as a 

condition of obtaining this setting on the bindings at the time of their delivery, 

I must agree to forever release the shop, its employees and agents, 

the manufacturer, and the distributor from any and all liability for injury 

or death which results to me or others from the use of these bindings. I 

acknowledge that there may be increased risk of injury or death to me as 

a result of my own personal preference for binding setting, particularly in 

view of the inherent and other risks of the sport of skiing. I hereby waive 

all claims arising from the use of the bindings and release from all liability 

the shop, the distributor and the manufacturer, their agents and employees 

and I further agree to indemnify them from any and all liability or 

harm or damage of any kind whatsoever which may result from the use of 

these bindings by myself or anyone I allow to use the bindings. 

I, the undersigned, have read and understand this liability release agreement, 

and agree that it is binding upon me, my heirs, guardians, administrators, 

assigns, and legal representatives. 

Skier Signature 

(or, in the case of a minor, that of the skier’s parent or guardian) 

Shop Manager’s Signature 

Step 4

Step 4 

Binding 

2010/2011 Salomon adjustment chart 

retaIl systems > release value > 16 

releaSe Value Selection & adJuStMent > (continued) 

All current model Salomon 

bindings use the DIN 

adjustment scale. Release 

setting numbers on this 

scale are referred to as 

“visual indicator settings.” 

Some older model 

Salomon bindings were 

manufactured prior to the 

establishment of the DIN 

standard scale and use 

a different adjustment 

scale. Refer to previous 

Shop Practices Manuals to 

adjust these models. 

The 2010/2011 

Adjustment Chart is the 

only release adjustment 

chart authorized for 

Salomon dealers during 

the 2010/2011 season. 

Only those settings 

recommended by Salomon 

should be used when determining 

the appropriate 

adjustment for each skier’s 

system. Refer to Skier’s 

requesting Settings 

not recommended by 

Salomon (page 15) for 

skiers requesting other 

settings. 

determining & adjusting Visual indicator Settings 

The following procedure is used for 

determining visual indicator settings 

using the 2010/2011 Salomon 

Adjustment Chart. 

1. Find the Skier’s Code. Locate the 

skier’s weight and height in the 

first two columns. If the skier’s 

weight and height are not in the 

same row, select the Skier’s code 

that is closest to the top of the 

chart. 

2. The skier’s code is appropriate for 

Type 1 skiers: 

• For Type 2 skiers, move down 

on the chart one row. 

• For Type 3 skiers, move down 

on the chart two rows. 

2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART 

22- 

29 

30- 

38 

39- 

47 

48- 

56 

57- 

66 

67- 

78 

79- 

91 

92- 

107 

108- 

125 

126- 

147 

148- 

174 

175- 

209 

>- 

210 

10- 

13 

14- 

17 

18- 

21 

22- 

25 

26- 

30 

31- 

35 

36- 

41 

42- 

48 

49- 

57 

58- 

66 

67- 

78 

79- 

94 

>- 

95 

Skier 

Weight Height Skier 

lb kg ft-in/cm Code* 

- 6'5" 

>- 195 cm 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

< - 231- 251- 271- 291- 311- 331- > - 

230 mm 250 mm 270 mm 290 mm 310 mm 330 mm 350 mm 351 mm 

3 /4 

1 

11 1 / 2 

1 1 / 2 

1 / 2 

2 

3 

3 /4 

3 /4 

11 1 / 4 

1 1 / 4 

1 / 4 

21 / 2 21 2 / 4 

1 / 2 21 2 / 4 

1 / 2 21 / 4 

* Based on "Type 1" Skier 

• For Type -1 skiers, move up on 

the chart one row. 

• For Type 3+ skiers, move down 

on the chart three rows. 

• A skier may select different skier 

types for toe and heel piece. 

3. For skiers age 9 and younger or 

age 50 and older, move up the 

chart one row. 

• For skiers 29 lbs. and under, no 

further correction is appropriate. 

• For skiers 38 lbs. and under, 

Skier Type -1 is inappropriate. 

4. Locate the column that represents 

the skier’s boot sole length (in 

mm). 

3 /4 

23 / 4 21 2 / 2 

3 / 4 21 2 / 2 

3 / 4 21 / 2 

31 3 / 2 

1 3 / 2 

1 / 2 

3 /4 

11 1 / 4 

1 1 / 4 

1 / 4 

13 / 4 11 1 / 2 

3 / 4 11 1 / 2 

3 / 4 11 / 2 

Initial Toe/Heel Indicator 

by Boot Sole Length (mm) 

2 

3 

3 /4 

1 

11 1 / 1 

2 1 /4 1 / 1 1 2 1 /4 1 / 1 

2 1 /4 

13 1 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 /2 

3 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 1 /2 

3 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 /2 

21 2 / 3 

4 2 1 /4 

1 / 3 2 4 2 1 /4 

1 / 3 

4 2 1 /4 

23 2 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 /4 

3 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 2 /4 

3 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 /4 

31 3 / 3 

2 3 3 2 /4 

1 / 3 3 2 3 3 2 /4 

1 / 3 

2 3 3 2 /4 

41 4 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 3 /2 

1 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 4 3 /2 

1 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 3 /2 

13 1 / 4 

3 1 / 4 

3 / 4 

2 

21 2 / 2 

1 2 / 2 

1 / 2 

3 

3 1 / 2 

51 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 3 1 5 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 3 1 5 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 

61 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 6 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 6 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 / 2 

71 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 7 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 7 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 / 2 

81 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 8 / 2 

1 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 8 / 2 

1 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 / 2 

10 91 10 9 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 8 7 /2 

1 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 10 9 8 7 /2 

1 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 8 7 /2 

9 1 / 2 

111 / 2 11 10 9 9 1 11 / 2 

1 / 2 11 10 9 9 1 11 / 2 

1 / 2 11 10 9 

5. The box at the intersection of the 

skier’s boot sole length column 

and the Skier’s Code row shows 

the initial visual indicator setting 

for the skier. If the intersection 

of the row and column falls in a 

blank box, move left or right on 

the same row to the nearest box 

showing a visual indicator setting. 

6. Record the visual indicator settings 

on the Workshop Form. 

• If a skier selects different skier 

types for toe and heel piece, it 

must be recorded on the workshop 

or rental form in the order 

toe/heel (T/H), using a (/) to 

separate the two types. 

12 101 12 11 10 / 2 

1 12 11 10 / 2 

1 11 / 2 

Torque Range 

(Newton Meters) 

REF. 

Inspection Range 

In-use Range 

Twist Forward 

Lean 

5 18 

8 29 

11 40 

14 52 

17 64 

20 75 

23 87 

27 102 

31 120 

37 141 

43 165 165 

50 194 

58 229 

67 271 271 

78 320 320 

91 380 

105 452 

121 520 

137 588 

Visual indicator Setting adjustment 

Adjust both toes and heels of the 

system to the visual indicator setting 

derived from the adjustment chart. 

Sometimes a technician may experience 

difficulty determining exactly 

where the visual indicator should 

appear in the binding’s visual indicator 

window. For example, a setting of 

51/2 is not precisely marked on the 

binding. The technician should use 

those values that are clearly marked 

on the binding as reference points 

and set the release adjustment as 

close as possible to the setting that 

is recorded on the Workshop Form.

Binding 

Visual inspection of System components 

retaIl systems > fInal checkIng > 17 

final checKing & ViSual inSpection 

While anyone can mount and adjust a Salomon binding, to receive indemnification from Salomon a Salomon 

Certified Technician must sign or initial the Workshop Form attesting that all systems inspections have been 

performed. A Final Check is your quality control measure to verify that all required procedures have been 

properly completed. 

common compatibility problems 

the Boot 

• Inconsistencies with ISO and 

applicable norms. 

• Gross irregularities where the 

boot contacts the binding and 

the AFD. 

• Unacceptable low grade 

thermoplastic construction. 

• Rubber and/or metal tip 

protectors 

• Mold flashings. 

• Excessive wear. 

the Binding components 

• Stripped, loose or 

missing screws. 

• Condition of the AFD (ripped, 

loose, imbedded dirt, boot sole 

pattern, tread imprint, etc.). 

• Condition of anti-friction inserts 

(where applicable). 

• Missing or unreadable visual 

indicators and missing windows. 

• Bent or broken baseplate, 

principal axis or housing. 

test for elastic travel & return 

A 

• Debris lodged in the sole. 

• Warped or improperly canted 

boot sole. 

• Cut-outs in the sole that 

impede proper brake function. 

(If you are uncertain of boot 

compatibility, perform the clean 

vs. lubricated test. Boots that 

fail this test or violate any of the 

above points should not be used 

with any Salomon binding.) 

• Stripped or jammed toe height 

and cup adjustment screws. 

• Jammed release adjustment 

screw. 

• Other visible wear. 

• Improperly installed leash 

or brake. 

• Irregular heel track function. 

• Bent or broken baseplate, track 

or heel. 

S 

lateral 

Secure the ski. Hit the forefoot area of the boot with an object that will not 

damage the boot, such as a rubber hammer. fig. A Use sufficient force 

to move the boot off-center, but not hard enough to release the system. 

The boot should move off-center at least 5 mm and return to center 

within 2 mm of its original position. 

Vertical 

Depress the heel lever while pulling forward on the upper cuff of the boot 

until the boot heel lifts at least 5 mm. fig. S Release both hands simultaneously. 

The boot should return to the ski quickly and smoothly. This 

inspection can be performed either manually or by using a mechanical 

testing device. If a testing device is used, follow the recommendations of 

the test device manufacturer for proper procedure. 

If the system passes these tests, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop 

Form for “Test for Elastic Travel & Return”. If the system fails, see 

troubleshooting. 

the Ski 

• Mounting screws protruding 

through the base. 

• Delaminated sidewall. This can 

be detected visually or by running 

your fingers along the sides 

of the ski. 

• Binding baseplates not flush with 

ski surface. 

the Ski Brake 

• Improper brake arm length. 

• Improper installation. 

• Broken entry pedals. 

• Bent or broken brake arms. 

test for Boot/Binding compatibility 

• Delaminated topskin. 

• Pre-drilled holes. As a general 

rule, bindings should not be 

installed on skis that have previously 

been drilled for three or 

more sets of bindings. 

• Strength of ski brake. A brake 

must not compress totally when 

the ski is set on a flat surface. 

• Other visible wear. 

Visual inspection of the complete System 

place the boot in the binding and check the accuracy of: 

• Toe height adjustment 

(if applicable). 

• Toe cup width adjustment 


• Central roller adjustment 


• Forward pressure adjustment. 

• Visual indicator settings. 

• Symmetrical mounting of bindings 

to ski center line (%1 mm). 

This should be in the same location 

on both skis. 

Check the boot/binding combination to ensure all components are compatible. 

Unless a binding is specifically designed for use with both junior 

and adult norm boot soles, adult and junior systems cannot be combined, 

e.g., junior boots with adult bindings or vice versa. If the system passes 

this test, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop Form for “Test of Boot- 

Binding Compatibility.” 

If you are not sure that the boot complies with standards or if you are not 

sure that the system components are compatible, see troubleshooting. 

reference 



Dimensions 

19 Troubleshooting 

21 Salomon Workshop Form 

Step 5

Step 6 

Binding 

Mechanical inSpection 

retaIl systems > testIng > 18 

It is a requirement* for Salomon indemnification that all ski/binding/boot systems be verified using a force 

or torque measuring device.** 

A previously damaged binding component or boot may break during the added stress of mechanical testing. 

Consumers should be advised of this possibility prior to any mechanical testing of their equipment. 

twist test & forward lean tests > release Value Within Specified range 

twist test (toe) 

A 

Exercise the toe by releasing it once 

in each direction. Measure and 

record the test result for both clockwise 

and counterclockwise directions 

fig. A with a force or torquemeasuring 

device. The test result is 

the middle quantitative value of three 

measured release values. If the first 

forward lean test (heel) 

S 

If the twist test or forward 

lean test results are not within 

the “Inspection Range” but are 

within the greater “In-Use Range,” 

the visual indicator of the component 

affecting the test result 

should be readjusted to bring the 

test result within the “Inspection 

Range.” If the test result is outside 

the “In-Use Range,” refer to 

troubleshooting. It is not neces- 

examples of Middle 

Quantitative Values 

3 Maximum 

release 

Values 

Middle 

Quantitative Value 

(Test Result) 

45, 40, 50 45 

60, 50, 50 50 

30, 40, 45 40 

55, 65, 60 60 

two measured values are the same, 

there is no need to take a third measurement. 

See examples of Middle 

Quantitative Values (above) 

The toe passes this inspection if 

the test results in both directions 

fall within the “Inspection Range” 

Exercise the heel by releasing it 

once. Measure and record the 

test result using a force or torque 

measuring device. fig. S The 

test result should be within the 

“Inspection Range.” If both twist 

and forward lean results fall 

results not Within the Specified range 

sary to record any of the test results 

on the Workshop form. It is 

only necessary to record whether 

the system passed or failed each 

inspection and the final visual 

indicator settings. Any system 

component that repeatedly fails 

any inspection should not remain 

in use. When the technician is satisfied 

that all required procedures 

have been completed according 

Sample Systems inspection ranges 

Based on Skier Code "L" 

x 

ref 

x 

43 

50 

58 

67 

78 

inSpection range 

as determined from the Salomon 

adjustment chart. See Sample 

Systems inspection ranges 

(above). 

If your test results for clock wise and 

counterclockwise release appear 

to be at opposite extremes of the 

within the appropriate inspection 

range, mark “Pass” ( ) on 

the Workshop form for “Release 

Value Within Specified Range.” 

in-uSe range 

to Salomon’s recommendations in 

this manual, he or she must sign 

the Workshop form. (The signing 

technician must be currently certified 

by Salomon.) 

inspection range, you may have an 

installation error or an incompatible 

boot. This is known as asymmetric 

release. Troubleshoot the system and 

re-test after the problem has been 

corrected. 

reference 


16 2010/2011 Salomon 

Adjustment Chart 



note 

*U.S. Dealers only; recommended 

for Canadian Dealers. 

**For Salomon indemnification to 

apply, the shop must follow the 

test device 

manufacturer’s requirements for: 

• Proper use. 

• Valid calibration. 

• Calibration check at recommended 

intervals. 

• Consistent results between technicians 

operating this device.

Binding 

troubleshooting 

retaIl systems > testIng > 19 

Mechanical inSpection > Troubleshooting 

Boot/Binding systems wear with time. This is expected. Normal wear and/or fatigue of a system can be 

expected. If a system inspection indicates a system is not functioning as intended, the cause of the problem 

must be identified and corrective action should be taken. 

The first step is to re-examine each 

component of the ski/binding/boot 

system individually. If a problem 

is found, e.g., stripped toe height 

screw, out-of-standard boot sole, 

improperly mounted binding, missing 

AFD, etc., proper Binding-to- 

Boot adjustments cannot be made. 

No further work can be performed 

on the system. Mark “Fail” ( ) 

on this section of the Workshop 

form.* 

On used bindings, inspect all boot 

to binding points of contact for excessive 

wear. 

If the system failed the test for 

elastic travel & return, check 

that all boot/binding interfaces are 

clean, smooth and clear of debris. 

If the boot is dirty, clean it with a 

solution of mild dish washing soap 

and water. If the binding is dirty, 

clean it according to the procedures 

described in Maintenance 

and repair. Check that the boot 

enters the binding correctly. Make 

lubricated test 

Twist (Nm) 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

fail 

pass 

10 

0 

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 

Twist (Nm) 

clean test 

sure the boot is properly positioned 

in the toe and heel cups. Check 

the visual indicator settings. They 

should not exceed the minimum or 

maximum setting and should be set 

appropriately for the skier. Re-test 

the system for elastic travel & 

return. If the system fails this test, 

mark "Fail" ( ) on this section of 

the Workshop form.* 

If the system failed the Test For 

Boot/Binding Compatibility, mark 

"Fail" ( ) on this section of the 

Workshop form.* If you are not 

sure that the boot complies with 

the mandatory standards, or if you 

are not sure that the boot/binding 

system components are compatible, 

do a clean vs. lubricated 

test. To perform a clean vs. 

lubricated test, all adjustments 

to the system, e.g., visual indicator 

settings, forward pressure adjustments, 

etc., must be the same as 

when the system was previously 

tested. Lubricate the boot with a 

compatibility tables: clean vs. lubricated tests 

twist test 

fail 

mild dish washing soap wherever 

it contacts the binding and wipe off 

any excess lubricant. Perform the 

twist test and forward lean test 

as done previously and record your 

results. Next, compare the results 

of the lubricated test with those of 

the previously performed non-lubricated 

clean test. Plot the results 

on the compatibility tables. If the 

results don’t fall within the shaded 

“Pass” window on the table, the 

BOOT is incompatible with the 

binding and should not be used. 

Mark “Fail” ( ) on the Workshop 

form.* 

If no problems have been found 

with the system and the release 

Value Within Specified range cannot 

be obtained, further tests must 

be undertaken. First, switch testers 

to check operator accuracy. Next, 

check the accuracy of the testing 

device per the device manufacturer’s 

recommendations. Re-test 

the system. If the system releases 

* the customer should be informed of, and authorize, action needed to correct the problem. please refer to 

the technical reference section for warranty information on binding components covered under warranty. 

forward lean test 

lubricated test 

Forward Lean (Nm) 

400 

360 

320 

280 

240 

200 

160 

120 

80 

fail 

outside the “In-Use Range,” mark 

“Fail” ( ) on this section of the 

Workshop form.* 

If the customer refuses to have 

work done that is necessary to 

bring the system within standards, 

or requests work that violates the 

recommendations of this manual, 

the technician should check the box 

next to the statement indicating 

out-of-standard components on 

the Workshop form. A note should 

be made in the Comment section 

of the form describing the problem 

and the skier should be warned 

that continued use of the system 

is inadvisable. The shop will not be 

indemnified for work done on that 

system. 

reference 


17 Test For Elastic Travel 

and Return 

17 Test For Boot/Binding 

Compatibility 


85 Salomon Retail Binding 

Limited Warranty 

pass 

fail 

40 

0 

0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 

Forward Lean (Nm) 

clean test 

Step 6

Step 7 

Binding 

retaIl systems > record keePIng > 20 

SKier inStruction, Warning & record Keeping 

Skier instruction & Warning 

When the Certified Technician signs 

or initials the Workshop Form, the 

technician attests that all procedures 

have been completed. It is 

not necessary for the technician to 

personally provide the skier with instructions 

as long as the shop does. 

To help reduce your shop’s liability 

risk and to receive indemnification 

from Salomon, take the following 

steps whenever a skier picks up 

their equipment. (If the individual 

picking up the equipment is not the 

intended user, treat that individual as 

though they were the intended user. 

In the case of minor skiers, follow 

these steps in the presence of both 

the minor skier and a parent or legal 

guardian.) 

explanation of entry/exit/re-entry 

The proper use of the system (entry, 

exit and re-entry) must be explained 

using the skier’s own system as an 

example. 

explanation of parts and 

release adjustments 

Show the skier where the visual 

indicator adjustment caps/screws 

are located. Point out the bindingto-boot 

adjustments. Indicate where 

the visual indicator settings are 

retail record Keeping 

A Salomon authorized shop is 

required to keep accurate records 

of work performed. Aside from the 

legal reasons, accurate records provide 

a permanent history of the customers 

you have serviced over the 

years. Workshop records must be 

kept for five years or for the statute 

of limitations of the state or province, 

whichever period is longer. 

The following is a list of information* 

that must be recorded every 

time a Salomon binding is mounted 

and/or adjusted. It is not necessary 

to use a Salomon Workshop form, 

but any form that the shop uses 

should include all the information 

listed below.* 

1. *Date of transaction. 

2. *Name and address of the skier. 

3. *Skier’s height, weight, age and 

skier type. 

4. *Skis (brand, model and serial 

number). 

5. *Boot (brand, model and sole 

length). 

6. *Binding (brand and model). 

recorded on the Workshop Form and 

have the customer verify that the 

settings recorded on the form agree 

with the settings appearing in the 

visual indicator window of the binding. 

(It is not necessary to explain 

how these numbers are derived.) 

Although skiers may work on their 

own system, suggest that if a problem 

develops, the system should 

be taken to a Salomon Authorized 

Binding Dealer. 

receipt of in-Box instructions 

When a skier purchases a new 

binding, it is required that they also 

receive the in-box pamphlet included 

in each binding box. The pamphlet 

should be reviewed with the skier so 

that it is fully understood. 

Skier Signature on the 

Workshop form 

The skier must read and understand 

the conditions specified in the 

Liability Release Agreement. Point 

out that the skier is signing a release 

of liability and that included in the 

release is a specific warning that 

the binding will not release under 

all circumstances nor is it possible 

to predict every situation in which it 

7. *Skier’s Code. 

8. *System inspection results 

("Pass" or "Fail" for all functional 

tests must be indicated). 

9. *Visual indicator settings. 

10. *Salomon Certified Technician’s 

initials or signature attesting 

that all functional tests and 

instructional procedures have 

been completed. 

11. *Liability Release Agreement 

which is either the same as/ 

or substantial equivalent of the 

Salomon form. 

12. *Skier signature (or that of the 

skier’s agent or, in the case of a 

minor, that of the skier’s parent 

or guardian) attesting that the 

skier: 

a. Has been instructed in the 

proper use of the equipment. 

b. Has received the in-box pamphlet 

(new bindings only). 

c. Has verified that the visual 

indicator settings correspond 

to the recorded visual indicator 

settings. 

will release, and it is, therefore, no 

guarantee of the skier’s safety. 

the Skier must then sign the 

Workshop form, indicating the 

skier: 

• Has been instructed in the proper 

use of the equipment. 

• Has received the in-box pamphlet 

(new bindings only). 

• Has verified that the visual indicator 

settings correspond to the recorded 

settings on the Workshop Form. 

• Has read and understands the specific 

information on the Workshop 

Form that releases the shop, manufacturer 

and distributor from liability. 

• Understands that skiing involves 

inherent risks and that injuries are 

a common and ordinary occurrence 

of the sport. 

• Understands that included in the 

Liability Release Agreement is the 

specific warning that the binding 

will not release at all times or under 

all circumstances where release 

may prevent injury or death, nor is 

it possible to predict every situation 

in which it will release, and it 

is, therefore, no guarantee of their 

safety. 

d. Has read and understands the 

Liability Release Agreement 

on the Workshop Form. 

e. Understands that there are 

inherent and other risks in 

the sport of snow skiing and 

agrees to assume those risks. 

f. Understands that included 

in the Liability Release 

Agreement is the specific 

warning that the binding will 

not release under all circumstances 

where release may 

prevent injury or death, nor 

is it possible to predict every 

situation in which it will release, 

and it is, therefore, no 

guarantee of their safety. 

g. Understands that bindings 

should be maintained as per 

suggestions in Maintenance 

Guidelines. 

13. Notes on the boot sole’s material, 

shape and/or condition 

should be made when necessary. 

• Understands that the bindings 

should be maintained as per 

suggestions in Maintenance 

guidelines prior to the beginning 

of each season and every 30 skier 

days per year. 

The person who signs the Workshop 

Form should be the intended user of 

the equipment. In the case of a minor 

skier, the signature on the form 

must be that of the skier’s parent 

or legal guardian. If someone other 

than the skier or the skier’s parent 

or guardian picks up the equipment, 

this person should be treated as 

though he or she were the skier and, 

therefore, must sign the Workshop 

Form. A note must be placed on the 

Workshop Form that the “agent” 

must transmit the information to the 

intended user. If a skier refuses to 

sign the Workshop Form, Salomon 

will not provide indemnification and 

the shop should consider refusing to 

provide service to the skier. 

receipt of Workshop form 

The skier must be given a copy of 

the Workshop Form that includes a 

signed copy of the Liability Release 

Agreement. 

14. If the visual indicator settings 

vary from the recommended 

setting, note the reason for this. 

Attach a signed release to the 

Workshop Form. NOTE: Current 

Salomon workshop and rental 

forms include a "Requested 

Settings" option for customer 

requested settings, which eliminates 

the need for a separate 

release in such instances. 

15. Refusal to serve statement. This 

statement should be written so 

as to absolve the ski shop from 

any liability when the customer 

refuses to have work performed 

as per guidelines of Salomon 

and the shop 

note 

* Without this information, indemnification 

will not apply. 

reference 



21 Liability Release 

Agreement 

32 Maintenance Guidelines

Binding 

(Shaded areas for shop use only) 


Taken 

By: 

Name: 

Street 

City 

Phone # 

Name 

Last 

First 

State Zip 

Your Weight lbs. 

Date 

Due: 

Downhill Skiing 

Snowboard 

Indicate Skier Type: Stance: 

Regular Goofy 

L ° R ° 

Acknowledgement of Personal Information, 

Equipment Instructions & Liability Release 

Agreement 

I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is 

true and correct. I will not use any of my equipment until I have 

received instruction on its use and I fully understand its use and 

function [including receipt of accompanying manufacturer’s 

instruction pamphlet[s] for new equipment]. I agree to verify that the 

visual indicator settings to be recorded on this form for downhill ski 

equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with 

the number appearing in the visual indicator windows of the 

equipment to be listed on this form. I agree to read and execute the 

LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT on the back of this form. 

Equipment User’s 

Signature: 

Parent/Guardian Signature 

(if not adult user): 

SKIS/SNOWBOARD/SKIBOARD 

Serial No: 

BOOTS 

Model: 

BINDINGS 

Brand: 

POLES 

Brand: 

Other: 

Work Requested 

Technician’s Signature: 

M.I. 

Date: 

Your 

Height ft. in. Age 

Model 

Sole Length (cm): 

Model: 

Length: 

Binding-to-Boot Adjustment 

Test for Elastic Travel & Return 

Test of Boot-Binding Compatibility 

Release Value Within Specified Range 

8410009333 ©2005, Moore Wallace All rights reserved. - 0207 

Salomon Workshop form* 

EQUIPMENT TOTAL 

FWD PRESSURE 

Equipment 

DIN SETTING 

TOE HEIGHT 

SCREW TENSION 

WAXED / EDGED 

TECH INITIAL: 

Labor 

Sub-Total 

Tax 

TOTAL $ 

RELEASE BINDING SYSTEM INSPECTION Skier’s Code 

PASS FAIL N/A 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

Due to system components that are out of standard or otherwise unsuitable, 

the work cannot be performed. (See COMMENTS below) 

Visual Indicator Settings Requested Settings 

L Toe 

R Toe L Toe 

R Toe 

L Heel 

Comments: 

R Heel L Heel 

R Heel 

Name 

retaIl systems > record keePIng > 21 

$ 

$ 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

( ) 

. 

. 

. 

LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT 

I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s 

safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards equipped 

with release bindings, this binding system will not release at all 

times or under all circumstances where release may prevent injury 

or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it 

will release. In snowboarding, cross-country skiing, skiboarding 

with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing 

and other sports utilizing equipment with non-release bindings, the 

binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings 

are not designed to release as a result of forces generated during 

ordinary operation. 

I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding, 

snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL SNOW 

SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH. 

I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of injury or death 

that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or 

which relate in any way to the use of this equipment. 

I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW 

SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of injuries to 

the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death 

can result from both low and high energy impacts, even when a 

helmet is worn. 

I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the facility servicing 

this equipment, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers, 

directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and 

their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from all 

liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results 

from the equipment user’s participation in the RECREATIONAL 

SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is 

related in any way to the use of this equipment, including all 

liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or 

any other person or cause. 

I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss 

or damage, including any that results from claims or lawsuits for 

personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in 

any way to the use of this equipment. 

This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or 

province. If any provision of this agreement is determined to be 

unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and 

effect. 

I, THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS 

LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT. 

User’s Signature: 

Date: 

Parent/Guardian/Agent: I verify that I am the parent, guardian or 

agent of the equipment user; I have the authority to enter into this 

agreement on behalf of the equipment user; and I agree to be 

bound by the terms and conditions of this agreement. 

Parent/Guardian/ 

Agent’s Signature: 

Date: 

note 

*U.S. form shown. 

reference 


20 Skier Instruction & 

Warning 



B1WSfM (U.S. only) 

Workshop Form 

B10008 (Can. Bilingual) 

Workshop Form 

Step 7

Step 1 

Binding 

rental & 

deMo Binding 

SySteMS 

Proper procedures for a Salomon Certified 

Carlson. 

Technician to follow while mounting and 

Sammy Skier: 

adjusting Salomon Rental 

Carr. Dan 

and Demo bindings. Photo: 

preparation 

For general Preparation Instructions, please refer to page 7. 

All rental skis must have an Identification Number and a method to record maintenance and testing information 

(e.g., Salomon sample Ski/Binding Maintenance record and Boot Maintenance record). 

Boot-to-Binding compatibility 

Bindings are designed to be used with specific norm boot soles, i.e., junior 

norm boot soles with junior bindings and adult norm boot soles with 

adult bindings. Under no circumstances should a junior boot be used with 

Jig Selection 

Two jigs are needed to mount 

current model Salomon rental 

bindings. The jigs can be used for 

both Synchro and non Synchro 

Systems. Please refer to the 

rental Jig Selection chart (right) 

for the reference numbers. 

See page 24 for Synchro preset 

requirements. Contact your 



001156 Adult Retail Jig 

001003 Rental Jig 

001040 Rental Jig Wide Skis 

78313301 Extralight Jig 

customer service representative 

for additional jigs to mount older 

models of Salomon rental bindings. 

See Jig Selection & use on 

page 8 for more information. 

reference 


7 Boot-to-Binding 

Compatibility 



25 Rental Visual & 

Mechanical Inspections 

28 Maintenance Records 

an adult binding. The C305 and S305 are designed for use with junior 

norm boot soles and smaller adult norm boot soles. 

rental Jig Selection chart 

Models Din Scale 

Z12 SC 4 to 12 

Ski width 

56 - 99 mm 

Jig Ref. # 001003 

Jig Ref. # 

Wide skis 

80 - 123 mm 

Jig Ref. # 001040 

Boot Sole 

Range 

(mm) 

22 

Synchro 

Pre-Sets 

Required 

(Toe height 

& Toe wings) 

260 - 382 • 

710 SC 3 to 10 260 - 382 

609 SC 2.5 to 9 260 - 382 

609 SR 2.5 to 9 230 - 308 

608 SC 2 to 7.5 260 - 382 

711 SC 3.5 to 11 260 - 382 

L 8 SC 2.5 to 8 260 - 382 

L 7 SC 2 to 7.5 260 - 382 

607 SR 2 to 7 230 - 308 

L 7 SR 2 to 7.5 230 - 308 

305 SC 0.75 to 4.5 216 - 304 

305 SR 0.75 to 4.5 190 - 246 

TZ 5 SR 0.5 to 4.5 190 - 246 

TZ 5 SC 0.5 to 4.5 216 - 304 

TZ 5 Juniortrak 0.5 to 4.5 24729001 200 - 308

Binding 

inStallation 

There are two basic types of 

Synchro System bindings: SC and 

SR. While both have a moveable 

heel piece, only the SC (Synchro 

Center) models have a moveable 

toe, allowing both the toe and heel 

piece to be adjusted to “center” 

the boot. 

To set up the Synchro Systems, 

you will need: Salomon rental bindings 

with Synchro Heel Guides and 

the parts listed below 



001156 Adult Retail Jig 

001003 Rental Jig 

001191 Wide Sizes Rental Sticker 

001189 Salomon Boot Sole 

Measuring Device 

000902 Rental Adjustment Tool 

legend 

Salomon Synchro System 

A S 

D 

Sr Models (non-moveable toe) are 

mounted using the Retail procedures. 

non-Synchro System Follow Synchro 

System procedures, omitting measurement 

of boots and affixing 

Synchro Stickers. 

Sc Models (moveable toe) are 

mounted using the procedures described 

below. 

first, set the jig to the proper position. 

It is imperative that the jig be 

set correctly and all bindings be 

mounted at the correct position. For 

consistent mounting, drill the jig and 

pin it in the correct position. 

Heel Track 

Adjustment 

Loop 

Adjustment 

Screw 

rental & demo > PreParatIon 23 


Heel Lever 

Heel Cup 

Brake Pedal 

* Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track. 

F 

next, place the jig properly on the 

ski, drill the ski and remove any 

shavings. Place a drop of glue onto 

the drilled holes. On SC (move able 

toe) model bindings, mount the toe 

plate securely with the four screws 

provided fig. A. Move the adjustment 

lever on the front of the toe to 

the left and con tinue to slide the toe 

onto the plate fig. S. 

Slide the central plate onto the toe 

piece, fig. D then position the heel 

over the central plate and holes, 

fig. F and tighten using a crisscross 

pattern. 

S912 Light 

Adjustment 

Range 

Indicators 

Spheric Pedal/ 

AFD 

C608 SR 

Toe Cup 

Toe Height 

Adjustment 

Screw 


G H 

Adjustment 

Screw 

Toe Length 

Adjustment 

Screw 

color-coded adjustment range indicators 

Brake Arm 

Heel Housing 

Baseplate 

Lubrication 

Point* 

2004/2005 and later Synchro center Systems use color-coded adjustment 

range indicators. 

Simply read the boot sole length in mm’s (stamped on the side of the boot 

sole) and move the toe to the corresponding mm length range position 

fig. G. Each range is individually color coded. 

Then move the heel to the correct color coded mm length mark shown on the 

heel track cover fig. H. 

Color coding makes it easier to read. For example: when the toe is positioned 

in the yellow (296 – 307 mm) range, look for the matching yellow rectangles 

(296 mm, 304 mm, 307 mm) on the heel track cover. 

Lines on the 

heel track 

300 to 303 mm Heel piece position for a boot 

sole length of 302 mm 

(white triangle on the heel housing) 

Toe piece position for a boot 

sole length of 302 mm 

Step 2

Step 3 

Binding 

Binding-to-Boot adJuStMentS 

adjusting 

toe position 

A 

Synchro center Models. Move 

the button on the front of the toe 

to the left, and slide the toe to the 

Synchro position indicated. Ensure 

S D 

rental & demo > InstallatIon > 24 

the toe locks firmly in place. For 

S850 and other non-current SC 

models, push the toe back, depress 

the button on the left side 

of the toe, and slide the toe into 

position. fig. A The toe locks into 

place automatically. The adjustment 

is correct when the mid-sole 

mark on the ski is aligned with the 

mid-sole mark on the boot. 

toe height 

heel position / forward pressure toe cup Width 

finger adjustment Models. 

Lift the adjustment loop at the 

back of the heel and slide the 

heel forward to the Synchro position 

indicated or until the binding 

heel cup contacts the boot heel. 

fig. S Release the loop, push the 

Junior tZ 5 Sc installation 

reference 



Adjustment 

25 Pre-Season Inspections 

A S D 

F 

G H 

The TZ 5 SC comes with an interface 

plate which must first be installed 

on the ski before sliding the toe and 

heel pieces onto its tracks. Mounting 

the TZ 5 SC interface plate requires 

a new jig (ref. #24729001) though 

the procedure should otherwise be 

familiar. 

boot down and check the forward 

pressure indicator. The silver tab 

should be visible in the housing 

window. fig. D (It is not necessary 

to put the boot in the binding 

for Synchro applications.) 

center the jig on the ski and drill 

as usual (refer to Jig Use as well as 

Drilling Tapping & Glue on pages 

8 and 9). 

Mount the TZ 5 SC interface on the 

ski using the screws provided. 

check the manual lock of the toe 

piece is totally opened (fig. A) 

automatic Models. 

Sport/Quadrax toes have automatic 

toe height adjustment. 

Micrometric Models. 

Raise the toe by turning the adjustment 

screw, located on top of 

the toe piece counterclockwise. 

Pull the boot back and continue to 

automatic Wing adjustment 

Models. Same as retail counterparts 

(see page 14). 

independent Wing adjustment 


(see page 14) or preset for 

Synchro systems using a preset 

toe width.* 

and remove the brake lock from 

the brake. 

Slide the toe piece onto the front 

of the interface until it corresponds 

with or is just above your boot sole 

length (fig. S). Make sure the toe 

unit clicks into place. 

close the manual lock (fig. D). 

turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise 

until you see light 

between the boot sole and the 

binding AFD. Turn the screw clockwise 

until the gap is no more than 

0.5 mm or preset for Synchro systems 

using a preset toe height.* 

Simultaneous Wing adjustment 


(see page 14) or preset for 

Synchro systems using a preset 

toe width.* 

note 

* Synchro presets. 

Micrometric toe heights, independent 

and simultaneous wing 

adjustments can be preset using 

a Standard norm Boot Sole (page 

47) for Synchro applications. A 

dab of silicone caulk can then be 

put into the slot of the adjustment 

screws to prevent tampering. 

Slide the heel piece onto the back of 

the heel track while holding up the 

manual lock (fig. F) until it corresponds 

with or is just above your 

boot sole length (fig. G). Make 

sure the heel unit clicks into place. 

caution: check again that the manual 

lock of the toe piece is closed 

(fig. H).

Binding 

rental & demo > adjustments > 25 

releaSe Value Selection & adJuStMent 

2010/2011 Salomon adjustment chart 

All current Salomon rental bindings must be adjusted according to the 2010/2011 Salomon adjustment chart. This is the only 

release adjustment chart authorized for Salomon bindings during the 2010/2011 season. For a detailed description of the charts 

and procedures recommended by Salomon, please refer to pages 15 & 16 of this Manual. 

rental ViSual & Mechanical inSpection 

The mechanical inspections discussed in this section are required of U.S. dealers and are strongly recommended for Canadian dealers, both 

in the interest of consumer protection and as a sound risk-management strategy. Maintenance records must be kept for all bindings and 

boots in inventory for both pre-season and in-season inspections. Only Pass/Fail results should be recorded. If bindings are switched from 

one pair of skis to another, this should be noted on the records. To receive indemnification from Salomon, maintenance records must be kept 

on file for five years or the statute of limitations in your state or province, whichever is longer. 

rental inspection Summary 

Since it is impractical to perform a 

full inspection each time a system 

is rented, a routine of preseason 

and inseason inspections has been 

pre-Season inspection 

Preseason inspections are performed 

on components of the 

release system: bindings and boots. 

All rental bindings, new and used, 

are visually inspected, and then 

tested using specially selected 

Reference Boots. Bindings that fail 

go through a troubleshooting proce- 

inseason inspection 

Inseason inspections are performed 

on complete rental systems to ensure 

that the equipment is adjusted appropriately 

and continues to function correctly. 

Typically 5% of the rental inventory 

is tested during each two weeks 

sampling period. The random sample 

is equally divided between equipment 

important terms 

correction factor: The value that 

must be added or subtracted from the 

initial visual indicator setting to bring 

the test result within the Inspection 

Tolerance (or Inspection Range). 

developed to verify release indicator 

accuracy, confirm correct 

equipment function, and assure 

proper assembly and adjustment 

dure to identify and correct the deviation 

or malfunction. If this procedure 

does not correct the problem, 

the binding is removed from inventory. 

All rental boots, new and used, 

are visually inspected for damage, 

wear, contamination, broken or 

missing parts, or inferior materials 

that is available for rental and equipment 

that has just been rented. The 

equipment in the “as rented” category 

is from real skiers in the condition in 

which it is either dispatched or returned, 

while the “available for rental” 

equipment may be set up for fictitious 

skiers. Only single skis, not pairs, are 

directions of release: Unless 

otherwise specified (see Inseason 

Inspection), the directions of release 

to be tested are forward lean and 

clockwise and counter clockwise 

in twist. 

procedures by the rental shop 

staff. Fully implemented, the procedures 

that follow provide rental 

shop customers a standard of care 

at contact points with the binding. 

In addition, one boot per “cell” is 

tested for boots that are new to the 

rental inventory. A cell is all boots 

of the same make, model, age, and 

shell size. A random selection of 

5% of all boots, previously accepted 

into inventory, is also tested. Tests 

tested, and testing at the toe is only 

required in one direction. A count is 

maintained of test results that exceed 

allowable limits. The magnitude and 

frequency of these deviations determines 

the frequency of future inspections. 

Shops that fail an inspection 

must sample daily until the source of 

test device: A device that meets ISO 

standard 11110 [or ASTM standard 

F1061] and has been checked and 

maintained in the manner specified by 

the device manufacturer. 

equivalent to that provided retail 

shop customers under current ISO 

[and ASTM] standards. 

are performed with a test device and 

a pair of specially selected reference 

bindings. If a boot fails, all boots 

from that cell are then tested. Boots 

that fail and cannot be repaired are 

removed from inventory. 

the problem is found and corrected. 

Then, as inspection results improve, 

the frequency of sampling and inspection 

is relaxed. 

test result or release torque: The 

middle quantitative value of three 

tests made in the same direction. 

Step 4 

Step 5 

Step 6

Step 6 Step 5 

Binding 

rental & demo > InsPectIon > 26 

rental ViSual & Mechanical inSpection > (continued) 

inspection procedures 

preseason inspection 

reference Boot Selection 

The Reference Boot is a boot of a 

designated sole length that is otherwise 

typical of the boot inventory. 

Use the procedure below if the boot 

inventory includes several models 

and a representative boot cannot be 

easily identified. 

1. Select five single boots with sole 

lengths as specified in table a 

for the binding type to be tested: 

adult, junior, or child. 

2. Clean all five boots with a mild 

detergent and water. 

3. Adjust a rental binding to the release 

indicator setting specified 

in table a for the binding type. 

4. Fit the binding to the boots and 

determine the Release Torque 

in all three directions of release 

(forward lean and both directions 

in twist). 

5. Average the Release Torque for 

CW and CCW twist release. 

6. Reject and replace any boot with 

a CW to CCW difference of more 

than 6 Nm for adult boots or 

4 Nm when testing child boot 

types. 

7. Rank the five twist results and 

select as the Reference Boot for 

twist, the middle boot. 

8. Rank the five forward lean results 

and select as the Reference 

Boot for forward lean, the middle 

boot. 

preseason Binding inspection 

The procedure that follows is an 

integral part of preseason maintenance. 

It is also a good way to determine 

if maintenance is adequate 

and which units have outlived their 

usefulness and must be removed 

from inventory. 

1. Clean areas of the bindings that 

contact the boot and perform 

all preseason binding maintenance. 

reference 


17 Final Checking 

17 Test for Elastic Travel & 

Return 

18 Release Value Within 

Specified Range 



Dimensions 

2. Visually or manually check: 

• AFD condition. 

• Brakes function. 

• Release indicator readability 

and travel. 

• Screw tightness. 

• [other product specific inspections 

if required] 

3. Fit each binding to the 

Reference Boot and adjust the 

release indicators to the value 

in table a. 

4. Check that the heel track and 

toe track code (if any) agree 

with the sole length code (if 

any) of the Reference Boot. 

5. With the Reference Boot in the 

binding, verify elastic travel of 

the toe piece by striking the 

boot toe with a mallet or dead 

hammer and checking that 

the toe piece returns the boot 

quickly and completely to center. 

6. Verify elastic travel of the heel 

piece by lifting the boot while 

depressing the heel piece cocking 

lever and checking that 

the heel piece returns the boot 

quickly and completely to the 

latched position. [other product 

specific procedures if required] 

7. Manually release the binding 3 

times in each direction. 

8. Lubricate all boot/binding interfaces 

with a mild liquid detergent 

and water solution. 

9. With the Ski Binding Test 

Device determine the Release 

Torque for each direction of 

release (forward lean and both 

directions in twist). 

10. Record “PASS” in the binding’s 

maintenance record if 

Test Results are within the 

Inspection Ranges provided in 

table a. 

11. Set the ski aside if the Test 

Result in any directions of release 

is outside the Inspection 

Range in table a. 

12. Follow Troubleshooting 

Procedure from the binding 

manufacturer’s tech manual for 

units that have been set aside 

and retest if changes in the 

unit’s condition or adjustment 

are made. 

13. Record “FAIL” in the binding’s 

maintenance record if, after 

troubleshooting, test results in 

any direction of release are outside 

the In-Use Range. Replace 

the “failed” unit and retest before 

returning the ski to service. 

14. If after troubleshooting, 

Test Results are outside the 

Inspection Range but within 

the In-Use Range, apply a 

Correction Factor to the unit 

and note the Correction Factor 

for that unit in the binding’s 

maintenance record. 

15. If many bindings fail, check the 

test device and re-inspect the 

Reference Boot. If necessary, 

select another boot and retest 

the bindings. 

preseason Boot preparation 

The procedure that follows is an 

integral part of preseason maintenance. 

1. Clean all boots with [a mild 

detergent and water], and repair 

or replace damaged or missing 

parts. 

2. Visually check: 

• Conformance with ISO and 

other applicable standards. If 

the boot contacts the binding, 

brake, or AFD in areas other 

than the designated contact 

points, it may be incompatible 

with the binding. [product 

specific figure or description] 

table a : preseason Binding inspection* 

Skier 

Code 

Binding 

Type 

Sole 

Length 

(mm) 

Release 

Indicator 

Setting 

Reference Torque 

(Nm) 


(Nm) 

• Boot material. If the sole 

at the contact points with 

the binding or AFD can be 

scratched with a finger nail, 

the boot may be of inferior 

quality and incompatible with 

the binding. 

• Boot sole condition. If the 

boot sole is damaged, worn, 

or contaminated at contact 

points with the binding or AFD 

in a manner which can not be 

corrected, the boot may be 

incompatible with the binding. 

• Brake compatibility with sole. 

• Rubber and/or metal sole 

protectors. If such materials 

contact the binding or AFD 

the boot may be incompatible 

with the binding. 

• Mold flashings. Flashing 

which can be seen or felt at 

contact points with the binding, 

brake, or AFD must be 

carefully removed. 

3. Remove from inventory all 

boots that have failed the visual 

check. 

preseason Boot Sampling 

Although sampling eliminates the 

need to test every boot before the 

season starts, the sample chosen 

must be representative of the 

inventory. 

1. For boots that are new to inventory 

or have never been inspected, 

take a single boot from 

each cell (a cell is all boots of 

the same make, model, year, 

and shell size). 

2. For used boots, take a 5% (but 

not less than 16 or more than 

80) random sample of the entire 

inventory. Make sure that 

there is at least one boot from 

each cell in the sample. 

In-Use Range 

(Nm) 

Twist Forward Lean Twist Forward Lean Twist Forward Lean 

F Children 270 2.5 23 87 20-27 75-102 17-31 64-120 

J Junior 306 4.5 43 141 37-50 141-194 31-58 120-229 

L Adult 327 6.0 58 229 50-67 194-271 43-78 165-320 

* This is an example only. Check the manufacturer’s tech manual before proceeding

Binding 



inspection procedures (continued) 

preseason Boot inspection 

The procedure that follows helps to 

assure both boot/binding compatibility 

and boot interchange ability. 

Note: when using table a, in the 

Boot Inspection procedures that 

follow, the Sole Length and Release 

Indicator Setting columns should 

be ignored. 

1. Randomly select a pair of 

bindings that have passed the 

preseason inspection from each 

binding type; adult, junior, child. 

2. Lubricate all boot/binding contact 

points with a mild liquid 

detergent. 

3. Without regard to whether the 

boot is new or used, sort the 

sample by sole type and length 

inseason Sampling and inspection 

The Inseason Inspection is a test of 

complete systems and all the procedures 

used by the rental staff to 

assemble and adjust the system. 

The program uses random samples 

of rental inventory taken at routine 

intervals. Any sampling program 

that gives every unit of inventory 

the same chance as every other of 

being picked is valid. 

Sample frequency 

Random sampling is conducted 

throughout the entire season. 

Frequency is as follows: 

1. After 7 days of operation. 

2. If the sample passes, the next 

sampling is taken after another 7 

days of operation. 

3. If two consecutive samples pass, 

sampling frequency is increased 

to 14 days. 

4. If a sample fails at any time, 

daily sampling is instituted until 

two consecutive samples pass, 

at which point weekly sampling 

resumes. 

according to the 20mm Sole 

Length Categories defined by 

the binding manufacturer’s 

Release Value Selection. 

4. In each Sole Length Category 

rank the boots by sole length 

and select the middle boot. 

5. In each Sole Length Category fit 

the appropriate reference bindings 

to this “typical” boot and 

adjust the two bindings to release 

as close as practical to the 

Reference Torque in table a. 

Use the Reference Torque corresponding 

to Skier Code [L] 

for the Adult binding, [J] for the 

Junior binding, and [J] for the 

Child binding. 

Sample Size 

Sample size is 5% of inventory but 

not less than 16 nor more than 80 

units as noted in table B. Sample 

size is based on average daily output. 

If rental output drops below 

50% of capacity over the sampling 

period, the sample size can be reduced 

proportionately. 

inseason inspection 

1. Take a random sample of the 

rental inventory as determined 

by table B. Take half the sample 

from inventory as it is either 

rented or returned and the remainder 

from inventory available 

for rental. 

2. Wipe the boot clean and cycle 

the boot/binding systems at 

least once in each direction. 

3. Test sample units in Twist (one 

direction only) and Forward Lean. 

4. Compare the Test Results with 

the Inspection Range for the appropriate 

Skier Code. 

5. If the results are within the 

Inspection Range, the unit passes. 

demo inspections > incomplete Systems 

Skis 

Bindings intended for demo applications, 

where customers supply 

their own boots, must be inspected 

using the procedures described 

for rental equipment. Whenever a 

demo or rental binding is used with 

a customer’s own boot, inspect the 

customer’s boot for Boot/Binding 

compatibility as described on 

page 17. Reject any boots that fail 

visual inspection. Both boots of 

the pair must be inspected and the 

boot sole lengths of both boots 

verified. 

6. Rinse the lubricant from one 

binding and mark it “clean.” 

Mark the other “lubricated.” 

7. Test each boot in the Sole 

Length Category with the clean 

Reference Binding and then the 

lubricated Reference Binding 

in both twist and forward lean 

(only one direction in twist is 

required for the clean binding). 

8. Set aside any boots for which 

the lubricated Test Result is 

more than 20% less than the 

clean Test Result in the same 

direction of release or the lubricated 

Test Result, in any direction 

of release, is outside of the 

Inspection Range provided in 

table a for the Skier Code used 

6. If the results are outside 

Inspection Range but within the 

In-Use Range, count the unit as 

a Class I Deviation. 

7. If the results are outside the In- 

Use Range, count the unit as a 

Class II Deviation. 

8. Check elastic travel and visually 

inspect the ski brake function, 

interface areas between boot 

and binding, including AFD, lug 

height adjustment (if appropriate), 

and forward pressure. 

Count any deficiencies as Class 

I Deviations. 

9. If more than the maximum 

number of Class I Deviations 

given in table B are found in 

the sample, or a single Class II 

Deviation is detected the sample 

fails and daily sampling must 

be conducted until the problem 

that led to the failed sample 

is found and corrected. See 

the “Troubleshooting” chapter 

of the binding manufacturer’s 

Boots 

Whenever customers rent boots 

for use with their own skis, the 

customer’s binding system must 

be mechanically inspected (using 

the rental boot) according to 

procedures described for retail 

equipment. 

to set up the Reference Binding 

(L, J, or F). 

9. Repeat the Visual Check on all 

boots that have been set aside, 

correct any defects noted, and 

retest. Remove from inventory 

boots that fail the retest. 

10. Check all other boots from the 

same cell (make, model, year, 

and shell size) as those that 

failed. 

note: On completion of the preseason 

inspection, clean the liquid 

detergent from the equipment (and 

lubricate the binding before returning 

it to service). 

technical manual following a 

failed Inseason Inspection. 

10. Record the date the sample 

was tested, the number of units 

tested, the number of Class I 

and Class II (or III) Deviations, 

whether the sample passed or 

failed and any actions taken. 

There is no need to record the 

identity of units tested or actual 

Test Results. 

table B : Sample Size 

Inventory 

Size 

(Pairs) 

reference 

Sample 

Size 

(Units) 

Maximum 

Class I 

Deviations 

100 16 3 

200 20 4 

300 30 6 

400 40 8 

500 50 10 

600 60 12 

700 70 14 

800 80 16 

900 80 16 


17 Final Checking 

17 Test for Elastic Travel & 

Return 

18 Release Value Within 

Specified Range 


Step 5 Step 6

Step 6 Step 5 

Binding 


Maintenance records 

SKi/Binding Maintenance record 


invenory #: Ski Serial #: Binding Model: 

Date of Service/Inspection 

Boot Maintenance record 

Repairs/Service 

Performed Visual 

Inspection 

Correction Factors Left Ski Right Ski 

Left Right Twist 

Toe Heel Toe Heel 

invenory #: Boot Model: Sole length: 

Date of 

Service/Inspection 

Norm Compatible 

Interchangeable 

All Adjustments/Parts 

Functionsl 

Repairs/Service 

Performed 

Forward 

Lean 

Twist 

Clean Test Lubricated Test 

Twist 

Forward 

Lean 

Twist 

Forward 

Lean 

Forward 

Lean 

Technician’s 

Initials 

Legend: Clockwise Counter-clockwise 

Technician’s 

Initials 

Legend: Clockwise Counter-clockwise

Binding 


rental Skier instrucion & Warning 

rental & demo > record keePIng > 29 

It is the Dealer’s responsibility to adequately assist each rental customer in equipment selection and to properly 

fit rental boots. Instructions regarding proper use of equipment must also be given at the time rental 

equipment is provided. 

When the Certified Technician 

signs or initials the Rental Form, 

the technician is attesting that all 

functional and instructional procedures 

have been completed. To 

reduce your shop’s liability risk and 

to receive indemnification from 

Salomon, you must take the following 

steps when the skier receives 

their equipment. (The individual 

picking up the equipment 

must be the intended user, or in 

the case of a minor, the user’s parent 

or guardian.) 

rental record Keeping 

Proper rental record keeping is key to your shop’s risk management program. Without a properly filled out 

form, including a signed Liability Release Agreement, indemnification from Salomon will not apply. 

A Rental Form must be filled out 

for each rental transaction (exchange 

of equipment is considered 

to be a transaction). A Liability 

Release Agreement the same as 

or the equivalent to the Salomon 

Liability Release Agreement must 

be included on the Rental Form. 

The skier must read, under stand, 

sign and date this release. A copy 

of the properly filled out Rental 

Form must be kept on file for five 

years or the statute of limitations 

of the state or province, whichever 

is longer. Multiple skier forms that 

allow each skier to read and sign 

the same form may be used if the 

form meets the requirements outlined 

in this section. It is recommended 

that the form be reviewed 

by Salomon’s Legal department 

prior to use. The person who signs 

the rental form must be the skier 

who is going to use the rental 

equipment. In the case of a minor 

skier, the signature on the form 

must be that of the skier’s parent 

or legal guardian. 

1. Show how to step into the binding. 

2. Show how to step out of the 

binding. 

3. Point out the visual indicator 

settings on the binding’s toe 

and heel pieces. The skier must 

verify that these settings agree 

with the settings recorded on 

the Rental Form. 

4. Ask the skier to read the 

Liability Release Agreement. 

Point out that the skier is signing 

a release that limits liabil- 

The following is a list of information 

that should be recorded for 

every rental transaction. It is not 

necessary to use a Salomon Rental 

Form, but any form that the shop 

uses must include the information* 

listed below. Without this 

information*, indemnification will 

not apply. 

1. *Rental dates. 

2. *Name and home address of 

the skier. 

3. Skier’s home phone number. 

4. Skier’s identification. 

5. *Skier’s height, weight, age, 

and skier type. 

6. *Boots' inventory number. (If 

the skier is using their own 

boots, the boot brand, model 

and sole length must be indicated 

on the Rental Form 

and the boot must pass visual 

examination.) 

7. *Skis' inventory number. (If 

the skier is using their own 

skis, the system would fall 

under Retail guidelines and a 

complete system inspection, 

ity. Included in this Liability 

Release Agreement is the 

specific warning that bindings 

will not release under all circumstances 

where release may 

prevent injury or death, nor is it 

possible to predict every situation 

in which they will release, 

and are, therefore, no guarantee 

of safety. 

5. The skier must understand that 

there are inherent and other 

risks in the sport of skiing. 

including a mechanical inspection, 

must be performed and 

documented on a Workshop 

Form.) 

8. *Visual Indicator Settings. 

9. *Salomon Certified 

Technician’s signature or initials 

attesting that all required 

procedures have been completed. 

10. Rental fee. 

11. *Liability Release Agreement 

that is either the same as, or 

the substantial equivalent of, 

the Salomon release. Consult 

your shop’s legal advisor to 

be sure the language and type 

size of this agreement conforms 

to state or provincial 

law. If a form other than the 

Salomon form is used, the 

language shall accomplish 

the same purpose and have 

the same legal effect as the 

language contained in the 

Salomon agreement. 

note 

* On the 2010/2011 Salomon Rental 

Form, the skier (or in the case of 

a minor, the skier’s parent or legal 

guardian) must sign and date the 

Liability Release Agreement. 

6. The skier* must then sign and 

date the Rental Form. 

7. The skier must be given a copy 

of the rental form that includes 

a signed copy of the Liability 

Release Agreement. 

12. *Skier’s signature (in the case 

of a minor skier, the signature 

on the form must be that 

of the skier’s parent or legal 

guardian) and date attesting 

that the skier: 

a. Has been instructed in the 

proper use of the equipment. 

b. Has verified that the visual 

indicator settings correspond 

to the recorded visual 

indicator settings. 

c. Has read and understands 

the Rental and Liability 

Release Agreement on the 

rental form, releasing the 

shop from liability. 

reference 


17 Final Checking & System 

Inspection 

30 Salomon Rental Form 

30 Equipment Rental 

& Liability Release 

Agreement 

31 Post Accident Ski 

Equipment Inspection 

Report 

Step 7

Step 7 

Binding 


Salomon rental form* 

Name: 

Street 

City 

Phone # 

Driver’s Lic.# 

note 

* U.S. form shown. The Canadian 

equivalent to this form has bilingual 

content. 

reference 



PLEASE PRINT CLEARLY 

(shaded areas for shop use only) 

EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT 

I accept for use AS IS the equipment listed on this form, and accept full financial responsibility for the care of the equipment 

while it is in my possession. I will be responsible for the replacement at full value of any equipment rented under this form, 

but not returned to the rental facility. I agree to return all rental equipment by the agreed date. 

I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards 

equipped with release bindings, the binding system will not release at all times or under all circumstances where release 

may prevent injury or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it will release. In snowboarding, 

cross-country skiing, skiboarding with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing and other sports utilizing 

equipment with non-release bindings, the binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings are not 

designed to release as a result of forces generated during ordinary operation. 

I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding, snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL 

SNOW SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH. I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of 

injury or death that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or which relate in any way to the use of this 

equipment. 

I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of 

injuries to the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death can result from both low and high energy 

impacts, even when a helmet is worn. 

I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the equipment rental facility, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers, 

directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from 

all liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results from the equipment user’s participation in the 

RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is related in any way to the use of this 

equipment, including all liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or any other person or cause. 

I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss or damage, including any that results from claims or 

lawsuits for personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in any way to the use of this equipment. 

This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or province. If any provision of this agreement is determined 

to be unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and effect. 

I THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT. 

29 Rental Skier Instruction & 

Warning 

partS 

Date 

Out: 

Last First 

M.I. 

State Zip 

Your Weight Lbs. Your Height ft. in. Age 

Acknowledgement of Personal Information & Equipment Instructions 

I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is true and correct. I will not use any of the equipment to be provided to 

me during this transaction until I have received instruction on its use and function. I agree to verify that the visual indicator settings to be 

recorded on this form for downhill ski equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with the number appearing in the 

visual indicator windows of the equipment to be listed on this form. 

Boot I.D.# 

Sole Length & Synchro # (Downhill Skiing): 

Ski/Board I.D.# 

Pole Code: 

Visual Indicator Settings Requested Settings 

Equipment Subtotal: 

L Toe 

L Heel 

R Toe L Toe 

R Heel L Heel 

R Toe 

R Heel 

Equipment Damage Protection: 

Total: 

Technician’s Signature: 


B1rSfM (U.S.) Salomon Rental Form 

B10019 (CAN) Salomon Rental Form 

Date 

Due: 

Snowboard 

Stance: (check one) 

Regular Goofy 

User’s Signature: 

Date: 

Parent/Guardian: If equipment user is a minor, I verify that I have the authority to enter into this agreement on behalf of the 

equipment user and I agree to be bound by all terms and conditions of this agreement. 

Parent/Guardian’s Signature: 

State 

Local Accommodations 

Equipment User’s Signature: Parent/Guardian Signature (if required): 

Total Rental Days: 

Downhill Skiing 

Indicate skier type 

Date: 

$ 

$ 

$ 

T H

Binding 

post accident Ski equipment inspection report form 



A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form the same as or equivalent to the form provided must be 

filled out if a person returns the equipment, whether the equipment is theirs or belongs to someone else, and 

claims that they or someone else were injured. The report must be completed with “as is” mechanical inspection 

measured release values. An insufficient or improperly completed form may cause denial of indemnification. 

inspection report instructions 

general information 

• All information should be printed 

clearly. 

• Any mistakes should be corrected 

and initialed. 

• If information is unknown, mark 

UNK in the appropriate area. 

• If information does not apply, mark 

N/A in the appropriate area. 

Skier information Section 

• Skier information should be taken 

from the rental or workshop form. 

• Accident/injury information should 

be taken from the ski patrol accident 

report (if available). 

equipment information Section 

• Information should be taken from 

the visual inspection of equipment. 

equipment inspection/tests 

Section 

• Refer to the most current Shop 

Practices Manual for Standard 

Boot Sole information. 

• Equipment inspections should be 

conducted on the equipment “as 

is”. 

• Inspection of binding adjustments 

should be in accordance 

with recommendations set forth in 

the most current Shop Practices 

Manual. 

• System visual inspections should 

be in accordance with recommendations 

set forth in the most current 

Shop Practices Manual. 

• Mechanical inspection tests should 

be conducted at room temperature. 

• The mechanical testing device 

should be properly calibrated and 

operated in the manner recommended 

by the device manufacturer. 

• Mechanical tests should be conducted 

on the equipment “as is”. 

• Test results should be recorded in 

Newton meters. 

facility/personnel/testing device 

Section 

• The “Inspection Technician” should 

be a current Salomon 

Certified Technician. 

• The report should be reviewed by 

the shop manager. 

post accident Ski equipment 

inspection report 

Skier information 

NAME 

v accident date 

height v 

Weight 

vage v 

SeX (circle one) v 

SKier type (circle one) 

inJury 

M f 1 2 3 -1 3+ 

right or left (circle one) v SKi area 

r l 

equipment information 

SKi MaKe 

Serial no. 

Boot MaKe 

Boot Sole length in mm 

Binding MaKe 

v Model 

v rental i.d. no. (if applicable) 

v Model 

v rental i.d. no. (if applicable) 

v Model 

toe ViSual indicator (din) Scale vheel ViSual indicator (din) Scale 

to 

rental forWard preSSure (Synchro) Setting(S): 

to 

equipment inspection/tests 

right Ski/Binding/Boot left Ski/Binding/Boot 

n/a yeS no (check one) n/a yeS no (check one) 

Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards 

All boot parts present, working correctly All boot parts present, working correctly 

AFD OK and intact AFD OK and intact 

Forward Pressure correct Forward Pressure correct 

Toe Height correct Toe Height correct 

Toe Wings set correctly Toe Wings set correctly 

Brake fully functional Brake fully functional 

Ski damaged (bent etc.) Ski damaged (bent etc.) 

System passes visual inspections System passes visual inspections 

Rental heel forward pressure setting correct Rental heel forward pressure setting correct 

ViSual indicator SettingS ViSual indicator SettingS 

toe: heel: toe: heel: 

clocKWiSe tWiSt MeaSured releaSe ValueS* clocKWiSe tWiSt MeaSured releaSe ValueS* 

i ii iii i ii iii 

counterclocKWiSe tWiSt MeaSured releaSe ValueS* counterclocKWiSe tWiSt MeaSured releaSe ValueS* 


forWard lean MeaSured releaSe ValueS* forWard lean MeaSured releaSe ValueS* 


* record the number of results recommended by the manufacturer of the testing device. if not certain, record 3 values for each test. 

facility/personnel/testing device 

Workshop/rental form no. 

v length 

Shop naMe v inSpection technician v date 

report reVieWed By v date v teSting deVice Brand v Model 

v SiZe 

Step 7

Binding 

Binding Maintenance 

& repair 

All Salomon bindings have 

replaceable AFDs 

Maintenance & repair 

retail & rental guidelines 

retail guidelines 

rental guidelines 

maIntenance & rePaIr > 32 

Any incorrect use of a Salomon part or accessory or installation of a non-compatible brand accessory with a 

Salomon system will automatically void both the warranty and indemnification for that system. 

Salomon bindings require a minimum 

of maintenance to enhance 

performance and their useful life. 

They should be cleaned, inspected 

and lubricated prior to each season 

and every 30 skier days per season 

as follows: 

• Inspect all components for damage 

or excessive wear. Repair or 

Proper maintenance of rental systems 

includes a complete inspection of the 

entire rental inventory prior to the ski 

season. Bindings should be cleaned, 

inspected and lubricated in the following 

manner: 

• Inspect all components of each 

set for damage or excessive wear. 

Repair or replace damaged or excessively 

worn parts and/or components. 

• Remove the heel by sliding the housing 

off the rear of the heeltrack*. 

cants > acceptable use 

replace damaged or excessively 

worn parts and/or components. 

• Clean the exposed areas of the 

components with a cloth or rag. 

Wipe any dirt or grit from the 

binding housings, heel track and 

the region under the heel cup. Do 

not use solvents or high pressure 

• Clean the exposed areas of the components 

with a cloth or rag. Wipe 

any dirt or grit from the binding 

housings, heel track and the region 

under the heel cup. Do not use solvents 

or high pressure liquid cleaning 

systems to clean bindings. 

• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref. 

#000905) or the equivalent to the 

lubrication points indicated for each 

model. Do not use silicone or penetrating 

oils unless the lubricant is 

specifically approved. 

liquid cleaning systems to clean 

bindings. 

• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref. 

#000905) or the equivalent to the 

lubrica tion points indicated for 

the appropriate model. Do not use 

silicone or penetrating oils unless 

the lubricant is specifically approved. 

• Replace the heel on the track. 

• This should be followed by periodic 

in-season inspections and when a 

binding looks particularly dirty or if 

visual inspection reveals that something 

may be wrong. This helps 

to ensure that all components are 

functioning correctly. 

Never attempt to interchange any SR, 

SC or retail toe baseplates or heel 

tracks with other model baseplates or 

heel tracks. 

Salomon bindings should not be altered in any way except as explicitly outlined in this manual. 

the use of cants with Salomon bindings is acceptable, provided: 

• The cants are of a high grade material 

designed for this use. 

• The cants are installed in a professional 

manner. 

• Proper screw penetration into the 

ski meets current norms. 

• The cants do not impede the binding’s 

function as it was designed, 

including proper function of the 

brake. 

• Recommend to the skier that 

routine maintenance and inspections 

be performed by a Salomon 

Authorized Dealer. This will help 

ensure that any problem that 

may develop with the system can 

be detected and corrected by a 

trained technician. 

rental post Season Storage 

To prepare rental equipment for summer 

storage: 

• All binding visual indicator adjustments 

should be reduced to the lowest 

setting. Do not attempt to adjust 

the release setting below the lowest 

setting as damage may result. 

• The binding heels should be stored 

in the closed position. 

• The equipment should be stored in 

a cool, dry and ventilated area away 

from direct sunlight. 

note 

* To remove heel pieces on tracks 

with heel locks, loosen the rear 

mounting screws at least three 

turns. Pull the heel piece back ward 

while lifting it up over the heel 

lock. To replace the heel pieces, 

follow the removal proce dure in reverse 

and tighten the rear mounting 

screws securely. 

Photo: Alexander Klun. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.

Binding 

Salomon offers a Screw Extractor/ 

Repair Kit (Ref. #000878) to remove/ 

replace broken binding 

mounting screws. The kit comes 

with two different length bits and 

a quantity of repair plugs. fig. A 

Repair plugs may be ordered separately. 

maIntenance & rePaIr > guIdelInes > 33 

Maintenance & repair > (continued) 

Screw extractor/repair Kit 

A 

afd/Scp replacement 

Stripped Screw holes 

Follow instructions for the installation 

of repair plugs (below). 

Broken Screw or Broken tap 

removal 

When a screw or tap breaks in a 

ski, it must be removed to avoid 

further damage. It can be removed 

as follows: 

fit the extractor drill bit into the 

electric drill with the shoulder 

touching the chuck. 

position the appropriate jig onto 

the ski with the jig bushing directly 

over the broken screw or tap. 

drill slowly around the broken 

piece using an up-and-down move- 

tZ 5, tZ 5 Sc & lZ 7-8-9 anti friction plate replacement 

A S D F G 

1. Insert a 6-8 mm wide screwdriver 

at the front of the plate. fig. A 

2. Move over the screwdriver to 

eject the plate. fig. S 

3. Place the new plate and hand clip 

it. fig. D & F 

Junior performance afd upgrade 

tZ 5, tZ 5 Sc, tc45 bindings were 

developed to fit both adult and junior 

boot standards, and are delivered with 

other Models 

Scp reference numbers 

Scp ref. n° Binding / System 

78830001 914 FIS 20 / 914 

Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12 Ti SC, 

Z10 Ti Axe+, Z10 TI, 

78830101 Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti SC, 

Z10, 710 Ti, 710 SC, 

710, 710 ITF. 

78829401 Smartrak Prolink +914 

Smartrak Prolink & 

78829501 Smartrak Control+ Z14, 

Z12, Z10, 711 

Smartrak Prolink & 

78829601 Smartrak Control+ Z12 

Ti, Z10 Ti, 710 Ti 

a universal junior pedal which has 

been validated by dealers and the TÜV 

organization. Salomon also offers 

a specific Junior performance afd 

(ref. 89267001) upgrade meant to 

increase slope performance for junior 

specialists, which can be exchanged 

with the universal one. note: The replacement 

junior pedal (red) must be 

used only with junior boot standards. 

1. Dismount the toe piece from the interface or from the ski. 

2. Remove the AFD from the toe piece baseplate. 

3. Position the replacement AFD on the baseplate and press it into place. 

4. Remount the toe piece. 

note 

For instructions on replacing the 

AFD on Quadrax models, please refer 

to the 2006-2007 Salomon Shop 

practices Manual 

For instructions on replacing the AFD 

on Spheric Performance and S710 Ti 

Spheric models, please refer to the 

2005-2006 Salomon Shop practices 

Manual 

ment to let the shavings escape. 

Use caution not to hit the broken 

piece. 

continue to drill until the chuck 

touches the bushings of the jig. 

This is the correct drilling depth 

of 10 mm. 

remove the broken piece inside the 

extractor bit with a pair of pliers. 

turn the ski over and hit the base 

lightly to remove all shavings. 

follow instructions for the installation 

of repair plugs (below). 

re-mount the binding. 

clean the extractor bit after each 

use. 

JUNIOR 

JUNIOR 

fig. G Specifically, it may only be 

used with junior boots with a toe 

thickness of 16.5 +/- 1.5 mm. 

caution: for models with elastic pedal 

(range 08), check the presence of the 

elastic block under the pedal. fig. H 

! 

installation of repair plugs 

The existing hole may need to be 

widened using an 8 mm diameter 

bit, however do not drill more than 

10 mm deep. 

place a drop of glue onto the top 

of the hole. 

tap a repair plug into the hole with 

a hammer until it is flush with the 

topskin of the ski. 



000905 Salomon Grease 

000878 Screw Extractor/Repair Kit 

000846 Repair Plugs 

H 

reference 



Dimensions 



54834001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Universal AFD 

89267001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Junior AFD 

Salomon control pedal replacement 

All Salomon bindings have replaceable 

SCPs. The specific SCP item numbers 

can be found in the Salomon Spare 

parts catalog (page 70), though some 

SCP Reference Numbers are listed in 

the chart below.. 

Replacement procedures for SCPs 

are as follows. 

for toes mounted on interfaces and 

Skis (Smartrak grip/grip plus, Sc, 

and itf) 

1. Dismount the Toe piece from the 

Ski or The Interface by completely 

loosening the mounting screws. 

2. Dismount manually the SCP on 

the Toe piece. 

3. Take the new SCP and mount it 

manually under the Toe piece. 

4. Tighten the Toe piece on the ski or 

the Interface (4Nm torque). 

for toes mounted on Smartrak 

prolink/control/response 

1. Put the Toe Piece out the 

Interface. 

2. Dismount the Toe piece from the 

Set by completely loosening the 

mounting screws. 

3. Dismount manually the 

SCP+Stirrup on the toe piece. 

4. Take the new Set SCP+Stirrup and 

mount it manually under the Toe 

piece. 

5. Tighten the Toe piece on the 

Stirrup (4Nm torque). 

6. Remount the Toe piece on the 

Interface.

Binding 

certification prograM 

The technician who signs the Authorized 

Location’s workshop or rental form for any 

transaction must be currently Salomon 

alpine binding certified 

technician certification eXaM 

2010/2011 technician certification exam Questions 

1 indemnified Bindings are: 

a) Those that appear on the 2010/2011 Schedule of Indemnified Bindings 

in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual. 

b) The 2010/2011 models only. 

c) Not something a technician needs to know about. 

d) Any Salomon binding still in use. 

2 Salomon technician certification: 

a) Never has to be renewed. Once you’ve past the exam. 

b) Is valid whether or not the employer is a Salomon Authorized Alpine 

Binding Dealer. 

c) Is valid for 2 years from the exam date and may be transferred 

between Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers. 

d) Does not require that Certified Technicians be familiar with Salomon 

Bindings through hands-on experience. 

3 What is Skier type? 

a) Unnecessary information. 

b) A classification system based on “cautious,” “moderate,” or 

“aggressive” skiing preferences. 

c) The degree of skill a skier possesses. 

d) A person who enjoys skiing. 

4 When a skier picks up their equipment from your shop make sure: 

a) You wish them luck. 

b) You only hand it over to the intended user. 

c) Someone explains the use of the equipment to them and provides 

them with signed copies of the Workshop/Rental Form and Liability 

Release Agreement. 

d) They speak with the technician who did the installation/adjustment. 

5 a mechanical testing device: 

a) Never needs re-calibration. 

b) Requires properly trained technicians for consistent results. 

c) Gives consistent results even when it is operated incorrectly. 

d) Is only used in rental shops. 

certIfIcatIon > exam > 34 

do not write on this form. indicate answers on the registration form. 

A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. In addition, questions 12 to 25 are 

considered core questions and must be answered correctly. 

6 When is the forward pressure correct on the ZZ laB and Sth 12, 14 & 16. 

a) When the boot in the binding, adjust DIN number. 

b) Place boot in binding and center with mid boot mark. 

c) When the boot is in the binding and the top of the head screw is 

aligned with the back of the heel track. 

d) Thereís no need for adjustment it is automatic. 

7 Mechanical inspections of rental equipment: 

a) Ensure that all components are functioning properly. 

b) Are required periodically in-season. 

c) Are required pre-season . 

d) All of the above. 

8 Workshop or rental forms must: 

a) Be kept on file for 5 years or for the statute of limitations. 

b) Be signed by the customer and the Certified Technician. 

c) Be used for every transaction. 


9 a post accident Ski equipment inspection report form: 

a) Is a critical tool in defending liability claims. 

b) Must be completed each time an accident is reported. 

c) Answers A and B. 

d) Is only necessary in the case of lower body injuries. 

10 if the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a 

boot do not agree, you should: 

a) Not install the binding. 

b) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to 

position the jig on the ski. 

c) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski. 

d) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks. 

11 When adjusting the toe height on Salomon Quadrax (leisure) bindings, 

you should: 

a) Use a Salomon rental adjustment tool for the toe height screw. 

b) Check your adjustment with a Salomon toe height card. 

c) Answers A & B. 

d) None of the above; toe height adjustment is automatic. 

Photo: Mattias Fredriksson.

Binding 

certIfIcatIon > exam > 35 

technician certification eXaM > (continued) 

2010/2011 technician certification exam Questions (continued) 

12 What should the initial visual indicator setting be for a 220 lb, 6’5”, 

type 3+ skier who is 25 years old and uses boots with a sole length of 

310 mm? 

a) 11 b) Ask the customer. 

c) Not possible to determine. d) 12 

13 When testing the toe for elastic travel and return, the boot should: 

a) Elastic travel only occurs while skiing and cannot be tested in the 

shop. 

b) Move off center at least 5 mm and return to within 2 mm of its original 

position. 

c) Move slightly off center then release completely. 

d) None of the above. 

14 a skier weighs 165 lb and measures 5’8” tall. he is a type 1 skier who is 

59 years old. What is his Skier code on the chart? 

a) H b) J 

c) L d) K 

15 When mounting bindings, Salomonís recommendation for tapping is: 

a) Always tap. 

b) Always tap unless the manufacturer cautions against it. 

c) Never tap. Itís too easy to damage the ski or break the tap. 

d) If you countersink the holes with the drill bit, there is no need to tap. 

16 Skiers requesting personal settings higher or lower than are indicated by 

the 2010/2011 Salomon adjustment chart should: 

a) Be given the settings they want provided they sign a Requested 

Setting Release Agreement. 

b) Be asked if they wish to identify themselves as Type 3+ or Type -1 and 

use the indicated settings. 

c) Be instructed to adjust their bindings themselves. 

d) Answer A or B. 

17 a six year old is being fitted for her first pair of skis. She weighs 42 lb. 

What Skier code would you use to help determine the visual indicator 

setting of her bindings? 

a) B b) A 

c) -1 d) 3/4 

18 a boot is considered incompatible with a Salomon binding if: 

a) It does not pass visual inspection. 

b) There is more than a I mm difference in sole flatness across its width. 

c) It does not conform to Standard Boot Sole Dimensions. 


19 if the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a 

boot do not agree, you should: 

a) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to 

position the jig on the ski. 

b) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski. 

c) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks. 

d) Not install the binding. 

20 if the forward pressure indicators on the heel are not aligning properly 

you should: 

a) Ignore it if they are close. 

b) Remove the boot and move the heel forward or back to correct. 

c) Make sure (adjustable) toe wings and toe height are correct. 

d) Answers B & C. 

21 you are testing a used boot-binding system on a mechanical testing 

device. the Salomon binding has a visual indicator setting of 6 and the 

boot sole is 320 mm long. What is the in-use range for twist? 

a) 58 Newton meters b) 58 to 78 Nm 

c) 43 to 78 Nm d) 50 to 67 Nm 

22 if there are no manufacturerís recommendations for drill bit selection 

you should: 

a) Drill the ski with the bit in your drill, you can’t go wrong. 

b) Use a 3.6 mm bit, you can always increase the torque on the screwshooter. 

c) Drill one hole with a 3.6 mm bit and check for metal before switching 

to a 4.1 mm bit. 

d) Always use a 4.1 mm bit, all mounting platforms contain metal. 

23 What is the correct maintenance procedure for Salomon binding? 

a) Cleaning all exposed area of the components with a cloth or rag, 

cleaning binding housing, heel tracks and apply grease. 

b) You may use any solvent or high pressure liquids to clean bindings. 

c) Bindings are self cleaning and do not need maintenance at any time. 

d) None of the above. 

24 What should the visual indicator setting be for a skier who weighs 69 kg, 

height 152 cm, boot sole length 310 mm, skier type ii, age 52? 

a) 3 b) 3.5 

c) 4 d) 4.5 

25 examples of Salomon bindings that may be used with both junior & adult 

boot sole norms are: 

a) 607 & 608 

b) STH 12 & STH 16 

c) TZ 5 & C305 

d) You canít use an adult norm sole with a Salomon junior binding. 

on-line registration instructions 

Applying technicians must complete the 2010/2011 Salomon on-line certification registration and test. 

A score of at least 90% (23 correct answers) must be achieved to pass the exam. Applying technicians are 

not certified until a passing score is achieved. 

• u.S. dealers will find the on-line certification 

registration and test at: 

http://www.salomoncertification.com 

• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for 

each Registration and Exam submitted on line 

at www.salomoncertification.com 

• The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/ 

Exam submitted by mail or fax to Salomon, 

or for technicians certified by any approved 

industry training program. 

Fax: (801) 334-4502 

Salomon Certification/ Customer Service 

Salomon USA 

2030 Lincoln Ave 

Ogden, UT 84401 

• canadian dealers will find the on-line 

certification registration and test at: 

http://www.salomonhookup.ca

22- 

29 

30- 

38 

39- 

47 

48- 

56 

57- 

66 

67- 

78 

79- 

91 

92- 

107 

108- 

125 

126- 

147 

148- 

174 

175- 

209 

>- 

210 

Binding 

2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART 

10- 

13 

14- 

17 

18- 

21 

22- 

25 

26- 

30 

31- 

35 

36- 

41 

42- 

48 

49- 

57 

58- 

66 

67- 

78 

79- 

94 

>- 

95 

Skier 

Weight Height Skier 

lb kg ft-in/cm Code* 

- 6'5" 

>- 195 cm 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

< - 

230 mm 

3 /4 

1 

11 1 / 2 

1 1 / 2 

1 / 2 

2 

21 2 / 2 

1 2 / 2 

1 / 2 

3 

* Based on "Type 1" Skier 

231- 

250 mm 

3 /4 

3 /4 

11 1 / 4 

1 1 / 4 

1 / 4 

13 1 / 4 

3 1 / 4 

3 / 4 

21 2 / 4 

1 2 / 4 

1 / 4 

23 2 / 4 

3 2 / 4 

3 / 4 

31 3 / 2 

1 3 / 2 

1 / 2 

Initial Toe/Heel Indicator 

by Boot Sole Length (mm) 

251- 

270 mm 

3 /4 

3 /4 

11 1 / 4 

1 1 / 4 

1 / 4 

11 1 / 2 

1 1 / 2 

1 / 2 

2 

21 2 / 2 

1 2 / 2 

1 / 2 

3 

271- 

290 mm 

3 /4 

1 

291- 

310 mm 

11 1 / 1 

2 1 /4 1 / 1 1 2 1 /4 1 / 1 

2 1 /4 

13 1 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 /2 

3 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 1 /2 

3 / 1 

4 1 /2 1 1 /2 

21 2 / 3 

4 2 1 /4 

1 / 3 2 4 2 1 /4 

1 / 3 

4 2 1 /4 

23 2 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 /4 

3 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 2 /4 

3 / 1 

4 2 /2 1 2 /4 

31 3 / 3 

2 3 3 2 /4 

1 / 3 3 2 3 3 2 /4 

1 / 3 

2 3 3 2 /4 

41 4 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 3 /2 

1 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 4 3 /2 

1 / 1 

2 4 3 /2 1 3 /2 

adjustment chart > 36 

311- 

330 mm 

331- 

350 mm 

13 1 / 4 

3 1 / 4 

3 / 4 

2 

21 2 / 2 

1 2 / 2 

1 / 2 

3 

3 1 / 2 

51 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 3 1 5 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 3 1 5 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 5 4 /2 4 3 

61 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 6 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 6 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 6 5 /2 5 4 4 1 / 2 

71 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 7 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 7 / 2 

1 / 1 

2 7 6 /2 6 5 5 1 / 2 

81 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 8 / 2 

1 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 8 / 2 

1 / 2 8 7 6 6 1 / 2 

10 91 10 9 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 8 7 /2 

1 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 10 9 8 7 /2 

1 / 1 

2 8 /2 1 8 7 /2 

9 1 / 2 

> - 

351 mm 

111 / 2 11 10 9 9 1 11 / 2 

1 / 2 11 10 9 9 1 11 / 2 

1 / 2 11 10 9 

12 101 12 11 10 / 2 

1 12 11 10 / 2 

1 11 / 2 

Torque Range 

(Newton Meters) 

REF. 

Twist 


In-use Range 

Forward 

Lean 

5 18 

8 29 

11 40 

14 52 

17 64 

20 75 

23 87 

27 102 

31 120 

37 141 

43 165 

50 194 

58 229 

67 271 

78 320 

91 380 

105 452 

121 520 

137 588

Binding 

technician certification anSWer forM 

2010/2011 technician certification answer form 

this form is for u.S. dealers only. 

Get all your certification needs 

at www.salomoncertification.com 

fees 

On line certification test: $12 Faxed or mailed test: $20 

technician & Store information 

EXAM DATE 

STORE ACCOUNT # 

SHOP PHONE # 

instructions 

TECHNICIAN’S NAME (PRINT CLEARLY) 

STORE NAME 

STORE ADDRESS 

please print clearly your information above and fax or mail your certification answers to (801) 334-4502. 

A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. 

In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and must be answered correctly. 

please circle your answer for each question. 

all answers must be clearly marked. any partially circled answers could be marked incorrect. 

answer Section 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

Mail or faX to: 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

Salomon Certification 

Salomon U.S.A. 

2030 Lincoln Ave., Ogden, UT 84401 

Fax: (801) 334-4502 

Phone: 1 (800) 654-2668 

TECHNICIANS SIGNITURE SIGNITURE DATE 

37 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d 

a b c d

SKi38 

Technical reference for the 

complete line of current 

Salomon alpine skis 

Photo: Hal Thomson. Skier: Rick Armstrong. alpine

alpine SKi 

adult Ski length Selection 

technIcal features > 39 

for the Salomon skis, find the corresponding centimetre length for your weight. 

Add to that number any additional length from the boxes below according to your ability, aggressiveness, the snow conditions you ski most of the time and the kind of skis you want to choose. 

Kg 

corresponding 

< 47 48 - 52 53 - 58 59 - 65 66 - 73 74 - 82 83 > 

SKi length cm 140 cm 145 cm 150 cm 155 cm 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm 

+ 

+ 

+ 

= 

SKi 

3V powerline; 24 hours; 24 daytona; 24 hours powerline S5; 

24 hours powerline S3; Select touch; Vital touch; fresh touch 

Junior Ski length Selection 

- 1 cm 

Kind of SKi 

total 

This total centimetre length is a guide, your preferred length will be the ski closest to the recommended total. 

Ski length (and binding) according to weight and height of children* 

XW fury Junior XS 

102861 

Jade Junior XS 102868 

24 Junior 111236 

XW fury Junior S 

102860 

Jade Junior S 102867 

24 Junior 111236 

XW fury Junior M 

102858 

Jade Junior M 102866 

24 Junior 111237 

XW fury Junior l 

102857 

Jade Junior l 102862 

24 Junior 111237 

Shogun Junior 111203 

Mai tai Junior 111204 

1. Beginner 

You are skiing the first 

week (rental skis) 

- 20 cm 

discover first ski sensations 

Approx. 

Age 

of Child 

3 to 7 

years old 

3 to 7 

years old 

6 to 10 

years old 

8 to 15 

years old 

6 to 12 

years old 

SKi 

2V powerline; crossmax; 24 hours powerline lM; 24 hours 

powerline S1; 24 X / 24 gt pro / 24 Sport; X-Wing; rocker / czar 

/ Shog un / lord / Knight; el dictator / Sentinel / twent y twelve; 

pro pipe / Suspect / threat; geisha / lad y / Maï taï / Vamp; 

origins diamond, origins opal, origins topa; origins pearl / origins amber 

+ 4 cm 

Child Height 85 to 95 cm 95 to 105 cm 105 to 115 cm 115 to 125 cm 125 to 135 cm 135 to 145 cm 145 to 155 cm 155 to 165 cm 165 to 175 cm 

Child Weight* 10 to 14 kg 14 to 18 kg 18 to 22 kg 22 to 26 kg 26 to 30 kg 30 to 37 kg 37 to 45 kg 45 to 55 kg 55 to 65 kg 

Skiing 

Aptitude 

Beginner 

Intermediate 

Good 

Beginner 

Intermediate 

Good 

Beginner 

Intermediate 

Good 

Beginner 

Intermediate 

Good 

Beginner 

Intermediate 

Good 

2. interMediate 

Able to ski most runs 

in good conditions 

- 5 cm 

Prefer moderate speeds 

Most of the time on groomed piste or on hard snow conditions 

+ 0 cm 

70 cm 

T5 

80 cm 

T5 

80 cm 

T5 

90 cm 

T5 

90 cm 

T5 

100 cm 

T5 

110 cm 

T5 

100 cm 

T5 

110 cm 

T5 

120 cm 

T5 

110 cm 

T5 

120 cm 

T5 

110 cm 

T5 

120 cm 

T5 

130 cm 

L7 

110 cm 

T5 

120 cm 

T5 

130 cm 

L7 

120 cm 

T5 

130 cm 

L7 

140 cm 

L7 

120 cm 

T5 

130 cm 

L7 

140 cm 

L7 

130 cm 

L7 

140 cm 

L7 

150 cm 

L7 

130 cm 

L7 

140 cm 

L7 

140 cm 

L7 

150 cm 

L7 

example for Shogun Junior / Mai tai Junior: a 6-year-old child weighing 25 kg (and measuring 120 cm), skiing at an intermediate level, must choose a 115 cm ski with a “tZ5” binding. 

*If weight is over 45 kg (142 Ibs), SALOMON strongly recommend to use an ADULT ski. 

Weight 

leVel 

3. adVanced 

Able to ski all runs 

in good conditions 

+ 0 cm 

Prefer a variety of speeds 

terrain 

4. eXpert 

Able to ski on all runs 

in any conditions 

+ 5 cm 

Prefer high speeds 

5. SpecialiSt 

Able to ski on all runs in 

changing conditions 

+ 10 cm 

Prefer highest speeds 

Most of the time off piste or on soft snow conditions 

+ 5 cm 

140 cm 

L7 

150 cm 

L7

alpine SKi 

drill Bit Selection for Salomon Skis 

recommendations for use of Skis according to the Mass of Skier 

To guarantee the sufficient parameters 

of safety (i.e. the resistance of 

the screws to wrench), skiers must 

use skis, approximate with groups 1 

to 4, in connection with the mass of 

the skier**. 

ALL-MOUNTAIN SKIS: X-Wing 

ON PISTE: Race / Allround 

Ref. and 

Commercial Designation 

Length (cm) 

Radius (mm) 

Midsole (mm) 

Weight (g per 1/2 pair) 

Thickness 

Rocker Shape (mm) 

Binding 

System 

technIcal features > 40 

Ski Model Ski Size Drill Bit Diameter Tapping Glue* Torque 

Equipe T, XW Fury Junior, 

Jade Junior, Shogun Junior, 

Mai Tai Junior 

< 140 cm 

>= 140 cm 

3,6 mm 

4,1 mm 

No No 

3 Nm (for these skis, use a hand screwdriver 

only to tighten the screws on the bindings.) 

All other models 

(except those above) 

All sizes 4,1 mm No 

Salomon glue 

4 Nm 

or epoxy 

*Put the glue at the bottome of the hole 

Ski technical reference chart 

TECHNICAL RECAP MEASUREMENTS Option Construction & Core Reinforcement Edges Base Specific Features 

SIDECUTS 

Waist 

Width 

Other 

Tip (mm) 

Waist (mm) 

Tail (mm) 

Group of Ski Skier Weight (kg) 

1 greater than 65 kg 

1, 2 65 kg or less 

1, 2, 3 45 kg or less 

(1, 2) 3, 4 25 kg or less 

**Extract from NF ISO 8364 June 2007 

Full 

Full 

• • • 

• 

Full 

Full 

Full 

• 

K XW Enduro + 

Z12 B90 

163 127 82 109 14.0 

108788 170 127 83 110 15.6 

119924 177 127 84 111 17.4 

184 127 85 112 19.3 

706 

744 

781 

816 

2130 47.0 260 

2230 47.7 270 

2330 48.5 280 

Z12 

2430 49.3 290 

Protrak • 

N XW Enduro 

163 127 82 109 14.0 

111687 

170 127 83 110 15.6 

177 127 84 111 17.4 

184 127 85 112 19.3 

706 

744 

781 

816 

1850 47.0 260 

1950 47.7 270 

2050 48.5 280 

2150 49.3 290 

• 

K XW Tornado Ti Pl + 

Z12 B 

152 120 76 104 11.4 

159 120 77 105 12.9 

111127 166 120 78 106 15.6 

173 120 79 107 16.3 

180 120 80 108 18.2 

633 

668 

704 

740 

776 

2000 46.3 

2070 47.1 

2140 47.9 

2210 48.7 

2280 49.5 

Z12 Protrak 

K XW Tornado Ti + 

Z12 B80 

159 120 77 105 12.9 

111135 

166 120 78 106 15.6 

173 120 79 107 16.3 

180 120 80 108 18.2 

668 

704 

740 

776 

1990 47.1 

2060 47.9 

2130 48.7 

2200 49.5 

Z12 Protrak 

N XW Tornado Ti 

159 120 77 105 12.9 

119981 

166 120 78 106 15.6 

173 120 79 107 16.3 

180 120 80 108 18.2 

668 

704 

740 

776 

1710 47.1 

1780 47.9 

1850 48.7 

1920 49.5 

K XW Storm + 

Z11 B80 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

111136 

160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

176 120 76 104 17.2 

645 

685 

725 

766 

1760 

1880 

2000 

2120 

Z11 Smartrak 

H X-Wing 8 + 

KZ10 B80 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

111137 

160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

176 120 76 104 17.2 

645 

685 

725 

766 

1740 

1860 

1980 

2100 

Z10 Lightrak C 

H X-Wing 6 + 

JL10 B80 

151 114 72 100 12.2 

111139 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

172 117 72 103 15.1 

642 

678 

713 

749 

1620 

1725 

1830 

1935 

L10 Lightrak C 

H X-Wing 4 + 

JL10 B80 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

151 114 72 100 12.2 

111140 158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

172 117 72 103 15.1 

599 

642 

678 

713 

749 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

1935 

L10 Lightrak C 

K 2V Race Powerline + 

Z14 

164 112 68 98 16.0 

120030 

171 112 68 98 17.0 

178 112 68 98 17.5 

185 112 68 98 19.0 

680 

721 

752 

783 

2180 49.5 

2250 50.2 

2320 51.0 

2390 51.8 

Z14 Protrak 


Z12 

164 112 68 98 16.0 

111101 

171 112 68 98 17.0 

178 112 68 98 17.5 

185 112 68 98 19.0 

680 

721 

752 

783 

2300 52.5 

2400 53.2 

2500 54.0 

2620 54.8 

Z12 Protrak 


Z14 B75 

155 117 67 102 11.2 

120031 

160 118 67 102 12.0 

165 119 67 102 12.5 

170 120 67 102 13.2 

638 

663 

690 

720 

2300 44.4 

2400 45.0 

2500 45.6 

2620 46.2 

Z14 Protrak 


Z12 

155 117 67 102 11.2 

111104 

160 118 67 102 12.0 

165 119 67 102 12.5 

170 120 67 102 13.2 

638 

663 

690 

720 

2130 44.4 

2230 45.0 

2330 45.6 

2450 46.2 

Z12 Protrak 

K Crossmax + 

Z12 B75 

154 119 70 99 12.1 

111113 

162 119 71 101 13.6 

170 119 72 103 15.1 

178 119 73 105 16.8 

645 

687 

730 

774 

1900 47.4 

1980 48.3 

2080 49.2 

2180 50.1 

Z12 Protrak • 

K 24 X + 

Z12 B75 

154 119 70 99 12.1 

111100 

162 119 71 101 13.6 

170 119 72 103 15.1 

178 119 73 105 16.8 

645 

687 

730 

774 

1900 47.4 

1980 48.3 

2080 49.2 

2180 50.1 


K 24 Hours + 

Z12 B75 

154 119 70 99 12.1 

111116 

162 119 71 101 13.6 

170 119 72 103 15.1 

178 119 73 105 16.8 

645 

687 

730 

774 

1900 47.4 

1980 48.3 

2080 49.2 

2180 50.1 


K 24 Daytona + 

Z11 B80 

148 119 69 101 10.4 

155 119 70 102 11.7 

111118 162 119 71 103 13.1 

169 119 72 104 14.6 

176 119 73 105 16.3 

611 

648 

686 

725 

765 

1720 46.0 

1790 45.8 

1860 47.5 

1930 48.3 

2000 49.0 

Z11 Smartrak • 

K 24 GT Pro + 

Z10 B80 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111120 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

606 

641 

676 

712 

748 

1575 

1680 

1785 

1890 

1995 

Z10 Smartrak 

H 24 Sport + 

JL10 B80 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111741 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

606 

641 

676 

712 

748 

1535 

1640 

1745 

1850 

1955 

L10 Lightrak 

C 

Sandwich Sidewalls 

Monocoque 

Edgy Monocoque 

Twintip 

Woodcore 

Composite 

Powerline 

Bamboo layer 

Basalt layer 

3D Race Frame 

Ti Laminate 

Wider Edges 

Total Edge Reinforcement 

Edge Armor 

Race Base 

Double 

Double 

Double 

3D Race 

3D Race 

3D Race 

3D Race 

3D Sport 

3D Sport 

Full 

Full 

Full 

• 

Full 

Full 

Full 

Full 

• 

All Mtn. 

All Mtn. 

Titanium 

Race 

Race 

Race 

Race 

Platinum 

Race 

Titanium 

Magnesium 

Magnesium 

Alium 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Single 

Single 

Single 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Carbon 

Double 

• 

• 

Double 

Double 

Single 

Single 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T • 

T • 

T • 

T • 

T 

T 

T 

4000 Ptex 

XL (85) Chassis (mm) 

Body (mm) 

4000 

XL (85) 

4000 

L (79) 

4000 

L (79) 

4000 

L (79) 

4000 

M (75) 

2000 

M (75) 

2000 

S (72) 

2000 

S (72) 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail; 

All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail; 

All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 





Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 









Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector

alpine SKi 

ON PISTE: Japanese Demo 

FREESKI: Exploring 

FREESKI: Big Mountain 

FREESKI: Park & Pipe 

WOMEN: On piste 

WOMEN: All-Mountain 

WOMEN: Freeski 

Ref. and 


Length (cm) 

Radius (mm) 

Midsole (mm) 


Thickness 


Binding 

System 

technIcal reference > 41 


SIDECUTS 

Waist 

Width 

Other 

K 24 Hours Powerline LM+ 

Z14 

K 24 Hours Pwline S5 + 

Z12 

K 24 Hours Pwline S3+ 

Z10 B 

H 24 Hours Pwline S1+ 

L10 

Tip (mm) 

Waist (mm) 

Tail (mm) 

155 117 67 102 11.2 

120033 

160 118 67 102 12.0 

165 119 67 102 12.5 

170 120 67 102 13.2 

154 119 70 99 12.1 

111471 

162 119 71 101 13.6 

170 119 72 103 15.1 

178 119 73 105 16.8 

155 

111467 

162 

169 

176 

151 

111694 

158 

165 

172 

119 

119 

119 

119 

116 

117 

118 

119 

70 

71 

72 

73 

72 

72 

72 

72 

102 

103 

104 

105 

99 

100 

101 

102 

11.7 

13.1 

14.6 

16.3 

12.8 

13.9 

14.8 

15.7 

638 

663 

690 

720 

645 

687 

730 

774 

648 

686 

725 

765 

641 

676 

712 

748 

2300 44.4 

2400 45.0 

2500 45.6 

2620 46.2 

1900 47.4 

1980 48.3 

2080 49.2 

2180 50.1 

1790 

1860 

1930 

2000 

1680 

1785 

1890 

1995 

45.8 

47.5 

48.3 

49.0 

Z14 Protrak 


Monocoque 


Twintip 

Woodcore 

Composite 

Powerline 

Bamboo layer 

Basalt layer 

3D Race Frame 

Ti Laminate 

Wider Edges 


Edge Armor 

Race Base 

3D Race 

Full 

Z12 Protrak • Full 

Z10 Smartrak • • 

L10 Lightrak 

N El Dictator 111144 194 139 114 124 43.4 856 2600 300 Dbl. 

170 

N Sentinel 111145 

177 

184 

191 

129 

129 

129 

129 

93 

94 

95 

96 

119 

120 

121 

122 

17.8 

19.8 

21.1 

24.3 

715 

754 

792 

832 

1900 

2000 

2100 

2200 

270 

280 

290 

300 

N Rocker 111691 192 147 127 137 48.5 840 290 720 • 

3D Sport 

• 

Full 

• Full 

• 

Double 

• 

Double 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Full 

Full 

Full 

• 

• 

• 

Full 

C 

Race 

Titanium 

Magnesium 

Alium 

Titanium 

Magnesium 

Alium 

• 

• 

• 

Double 

Double 

Single 

Double 

Single 

Single 

Single 

Single 

Single 

Single 

Single 

T • 

T 

W T 

W T 

W T 

Ptex 

Chassis (mm) 

Body (mm) 

4000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

2000 

2000 

2000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

2000 

2000 

2000 

4000 

4000 

4000 

L (79) 

M (75) 

M (75) 

M (75) 

S (72) 

S (72) 

S (72) 

S (72) 





Pulse Pad; Flat Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

Pulse Pad; Square Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

Flat Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

N Czar 

166 125 105 115 38.3 745/775 2020 

111143 

174 128 108 118 40.0 780/810 2120 

182 131 111 121 44.7 816/846 2220 

190 133 114 123 54.9 853/883 2318 

581 

626 

670 

670 

W T 

Pulse Pad; High Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

N Shogun 

164 126 97 116 20.6 

102732 

173 128 99 118 23.1 

182 130 101 120 25.9 

191 132 103 122 28.7 

730 

770 

810 

850 

1852 

1944 

2040 

2140 

250 

300 

350 

400 

• • W T A 

Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

N Lord 

161 128 85 113 13.6 

102735 

169 128 86 114 15.4 

177 128 87 115 17.4 

185 128 88 116 19.5 

706 

748 

791 

835 

1690 

1790 

1890 

1990 

210 

210 

210 

210 

W T A 


N The Knight 

151 122 85 14.2 713/738 1560 

107490 

161 122 85 

171 122 85 

112 

16.3 740/775 1660 

18.5 820/855 1760 

176 122 85 19.6 851/886 1800 

C W T 

Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm 

N Dumont Pro Pipe 111146 161 

Full 

Sandwich 

122 85 112 15.7 

171 122 85 112 18.0 

181 122 85 112 20.5 

796 

845 

895 

1785 

1885 

1985 

• W T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm 

N Twenty Twelve 111147 163 

Full 

Full 

• 

• 

Full 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

123 91 116 17.6 

171 123 91 116 19.7 

179 123 91 116 21.9 

803 

843 

882 

1785 

1885 

1985 

• • W T 

Pulse Pad; Twin Rocker FS; G1 ISO Norm 

N Suspect 

151 122 86 115 13.0 692/742 1560 

161 122 86 115 15.1 742/792 1650 

111148 171 122 86 115 17.3 792/842 1740 

176 122 86 115 18.5 817/867 1790 

181 122 86 115 19.7 842/892 1840 

• • W T A 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm 

N Threat 

141 122 85 112 14.0 666/691 1285 

151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560 

102752 161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660 

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760 

176 122 85 112 19.6 851/886 1800 

• C W T 

G1 ISO Norm 

H Select Touch + 

KZ10 Ti B 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111161 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

614 

649 

684 

720 

756 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

1935 

Z10 Ti Lightrak G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

H Vital Touch + 

KZ10 Ti B8 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111163 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

614 

649 

684 

720 

756 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

1935 

Z10 Ti Lightrak C 

G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

H Fresh Touch + 

JL9 B80 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111165 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

614 

649 

684 

720 

756 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

1935 

L9 Lightrak • C 


K Origins Diamond + 

Z10 Ti 

152 120 76 104 11.4 

111150 

159 120 77 105 12.9 

166 120 78 106 15.6 

173 120 79 107 16.3 

633 

668 

704 

740 

1750 46.3 

1820 47.1 

1890 47.9 

1960 48.7 

Z10 Ti Protrak • T 


H Origins Opal + 

KZ10 Ti B 

144 120 72 100 10.5 

111156 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

614 

653 

693 

733 

1620 

1740 

1860 

1980 

Z10 Ti Lightrak • 

T 

Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; Women Stance 

(Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector 

H Origins Topaz + 

KZ10 Ti 

144 120 72 100 10.5 

111154 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

614 

653 

693 

733 

1620 

1740 

1860 

1980 

Z10 Ti Lightrak C • 

Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); 


N Origins Topaz 

144 120 72 100 10.5 

118469 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

614 

653 

693 

733 

1360 

1480 

1600 

1720 

C • 



H Origins Pearl + 

JL9 B80 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

111416 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1410 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

L9 Lightrak C • 

Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm; 

Tip Protector 

H Origins Pearl + 

JL9 B80 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

111157 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1410 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

L9 Lightrak C • 


Tip Protector 

N Origins Pearl 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

118468 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1150 

1255 

1360 

1465 

1570 

C • 


Tip Protector 

H Origins Amber + 

JL9 B80 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

111159 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1410 

1515 

1620 

1725 

1830 

L9 Lightrak C 


Tip Protector 

N Geisha 102734 153 

Double 

Full 

124 95 114 18.5 

164 126 97 116 20.6 

173 128 99 118 23.1 

690 

730 

770 

1640 

1852 

1944 

225 

250 

300 

• • • W T A 

Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm 

N Lady 102748 153 128 84 112 11.9 

161 128 85 113 13.6 

169 128 86 114 15.4 

664 

706 

748 

1590 

1690 

1790 

210 

210 

210 

W T A 


N Mai Tai 111170 151 

Full 

122 86 115 13.0 692/742 1560 

161 122 86 115 15.1 742/792 1650 

171 122 86 115 17.3 792/842 1740 

• • W T A 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (> – 85 mm) 

N Vamp 

141 122 85 112 14.0 666/691 1283 

102753 

151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560 

161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660 

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760 

• C W T 

G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (> – 85 mm) 

• 

• 

2000

alpine SKi 

JUNIOR: On piste Jr 

JUNIOR: All-Mountain Jr 

JUNIOR: Freeski Jr 

RENTAL: All-Mountain 

RENTAL: On piste 

R: Freeski 

RENTAL: Women Rtl 

Ref. and 


Length (cm) 

Radius (mm) 

Midsole (mm) 


Thickness 


Binding 

System 

technIcal reference > 42 


SIDECUTS 

Waist 

Width 

Other 

J 2V Race Jr + 

Z11 B75 

H 2V Race Jr + 

JL10 Jr B80 

J 3V Race Jr + 

Z11 B75 

H 3V Race Jr + 

JL10 Jr B80 

H 24 Jr + 

JL10 Jr B80 

Tip (mm) 

Waist (mm) 

Tail (mm) 

120035 151 101 64 84 17.0 

158 103 64 86 17.0 

165 105 64 88 17.5 

625 

660 

695 

870 12.65 

970 13.5 

1060 14.6 

111304 130 96 63 80 14.0 

137 101 64 83 14.0 

144 104 64 86 14.0 

540 

575 

610 

850 10.9 

935 11.6 

1020 12.45 

120037 144 

151 110 64 

112 64 

111306 130 

137 105 63 

108 63 

93 

96 11.0 

11.5 

88 

91 10.0 

10.5 

595 

630 

525 

560 

905 12.8 

1050 13.64 

920 

980 

11.5 

11.9 

Z11 Smartrak Grip 

L10 Jr Lightrak Jr 

Z11 Smartrak Grip 

L10 Jr Lightrak Jr 

117955 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

• 

14.0 

585 

635 

1360 

1460 

L10 Jr Lightrak 

N 24 Jr 

120 106 65 86 9.5 

111237 

130 107 65 87 11.0 

140 107 65 88 13.0 

150 108 65 89 14.0 

485 

535 

585 

635 

880 

1000 

1100 

1200 

N 24 Jr 

70 91 65 75 4.5 

80 96 65 79 5.0 

111236 90 100 65 83 5.5 

100 100 65 84 7.0 

110 103 65 86 7.5 

300 

330 

365 

405 

450 

400 

440 

530 

620 

640 

N XW Fury Junior L 102857 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

14.0 

585 

635 

1100 

1200 

N XW Fury Junior M 102858 120 

130 106 65 86 9.5 

107 65 87 11.0 

485 

535 

880 

1000 

N XW Fury Junior S 102860 90 100 65 83 5.5 

100 100 65 84 7.0 

110 103 65 86 7.5 

365 

405 

450 

530 

620 

640 

N XW Fury Junior XS 102861 70 91 

80 96 

65 75 4.5 

65 79 5.0 

300 

330 

400 

440 

N Jade Junior L 102862 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

14.0 

585 

635 

1100 

1200 

N Jade Junior M 102866 120 

130 106 65 86 9.5 

107 65 87 11.0 

485 

535 

880 

1000 

N Jade Junior S 102867 90 100 65 83 5.5 

100 100 65 84 7.0 

110 103 65 86 7.5 

365 

405 

450 

530 

620 

640 

N Jade Junior XS 102868 70 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

91 

80 96 

65 75 4.5 

65 79 5.0 

300 

330 

400 

440 

N Shogun Jr 

110 92 76 84 19.5 

111203 

120 99 78 91 17.0 

130 106 80 98 15.5 

140 122 85 112 14.0 

487 

532 

577 

666 

715 

905 

1095 

1285 

N Mai Tai Jr 

110 92 76 84 19.5 

111204 

120 99 78 91 17.0 

130 106 80 98 15.5 

140 122 85 112 14.0 

487 

532 

577 

666 

715 

905 

1095 

1285 

HR X-Wing 8 R + 

Lightrak R 

144 120 72 100 10.5 

152 120 73 101 12.0 

102808 160 120 74 102 13.6 

168 120 75 103 15.3 

176 120 76 104 17.2 

606 

645 

685 

725 

766 

1620 

1740 

1860 

1980 

2100 

Lightrak 

FR X-Wing 6 R + 

L10 SC B80 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

111328 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

111218 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

172 117 72 103 15.1 

573 

599 

642 

678 

713 

749 

1550 

1655 

1760 

1865 

1970 

2075 

L10 SC ITF Loc 

NR X-Wing 6 R 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

102815 151 114 72 100 12.2 

111212 158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

172 117 72 103 15.1 

573 

599 

642 

678 

713 

749 

1150 

1255 

1360 

1465 

1570 

1675 

FR XW Focus + 

L10 SC B80 

111331 

125 112 78 102 10.5 

135 113 74 93 13.0 

111467 

145 116 74 96 13.5 

155 119 74 100 14.0 

165 122 74 103 14.5 

119391 

175 123 74 107 15.0 

556 

545 

595 

645 

695 

755 

1580 

1690 

1800 

1910 

2020 

2130 


HR 24 GT Pro R + 

Lightrak 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111205 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

606 

641 

676 

712 

748 

1495 

1600 

1705 

1810 

1915 

Lightrak 

FR 24 Sport R + 

L10 SC B80 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111207 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

606 

641 

676 

712 

748 

1635 

1740 

1845 

1950 

2055 


NR 24 Sport R 

144 115 72 98 11.9 

151 116 72 99 12.8 

111208 158 117 72 100 13.9 

165 118 72 101 14.8 

172 119 72 102 15.7 

606 

641 

676 

712 

748 

1235 

1340 

1445 

1550 

1655 

FR Crossmax 120 + 

L10 SC B 

111209 125 112 78 102 10.5 556 1580 L10 SC ITF Loc 

NR The Knight R 

151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560 

111217 

161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660 

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760 

176 122 85 112 19.6 851/886 1800 

FR Origins Crystal + 

L10 SC 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

111216 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1550 

1655 

1760 

1865 

1970 


NR Origins Crystal R 

137 112 72 98 10.5 

144 113 72 99 11.4 

102820 151 114 72 100 12.2 

158 115 72 101 13.2 

165 116 72 102 14.1 

581 

607 

650 

686 

721 

1150 

1255 

1360 

1465 

1570 

FR 24 Jr R L + 

L7 SC 

111814 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

• 

14.0 

585 

635 

1460 

1560 

L7 SC ITF Loc Junior 

RENTAL: Junior Rtl 

FR 24 Jr R M + 

T5 SC 

111817 120 

130 106 65 

107 65 

86 

87 

9.5 

11.0 

485 

535 

1240 

1360 

FR 24 Jr R S + 

T5 SC 

111820 100 

110 100 65 84 7.0 

103 65 86 7.5 

405 

450 

980 

1000 

FR 24 Jr R XS + 

T5 SR 

111824 70 91 

80 96 

90 100 

65 75 4.5 

65 79 5.0 

65 83 5.5 

300 

330 

365 

760 

800 

890 

FR XW Fury Junior L + 

L7 S 

111815 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

14.0 

585 

635 

1460 

1560 

FR XW Fury Junior M+ 

T5 SC 

111822 120 

130 106 65 

107 65 

86 

87 

9.5 

11.0 

485 

535 

1240 

1360 

FR XW Fury Junior S+ 

T5 SC 

111821 100 

110 100 65 84 7.0 

103 65 86 7.5 

405 

450 

980 

1000 

FR XW Fury Junior XS + 

T5 

111825 70 91 

80 96 

90 100 

65 75 4.5 

65 79 5.0 

65 83 5.5 

300 

330 

365 

760 

800 

890 

FR Jade Junior L+ 

L7 SC 

111816 140 

150 107 65 88 

108 65 89 13.0 

14.0 

585 

635 

1460 

1560 

FR Jade Junior M+ 

T5 SC 

FR Jade Junior S+ 

T5 SC 

FR Jade Junior XS+ 

T5 SR 

111818 120 

130 106 65 

107 65 

86 

87 

9.5 

11.0 

485 

535 

1240 

1360 

111819 100 

110 100 65 84 7.0 

103 65 86 7.5 

405 

450 

980 

1000 

111826 70 91 

80 96 

90 100 

65 75 4.5 

65 79 5.0 

65 83 5.5 

300 

330 

365 

760 

800 

890 


Monocoque 


Twintip 

Woodcore 

Composite 

Powerline 

Bamboo layer 

Basalt layer 

3D Race Frame 

Ti Laminate 

Wider Edges 


Edge Armor 

Race Base 

3D Race 

3D Race 

3D Race 

3D Race 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

3D Sport 

3D Sport 

3D Race 

• 

• 

• 

T5 SC ITF Loc Junior • 


T5 SR ITF Loc Junior • 

L7 SC ITF Loc Junior • 




L7 SC ITF Loc Junior • 




Full 

Full 

Full 

Full 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

• C 

• C 

• 

C • 

C • 

C • 

C 

C 

C 

C 

Double 

Double 

Double 

Double 

C W T 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

C 

4000 Ptex 

Chassis (mm) 

Body (mm) 

4000 

4000 

4000 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

4000 

M (75) 

2000 

S (72) 

2000 

S (72) 

2000 

M (75) 

4000 

4000 

4000 

2000 

2000 

4000 

4000 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

1840 

S (72) 

S (72) 





G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector 


Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; 

Reinforced Structured Top Sheet 



Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector 







Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector 





Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm 

Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm 


G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; 

Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector 

G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; 

Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Mat Top Sheet 

(only C/O version is concerned); Reinforced Black Base; 

Tip Protector 


Reinforced Mat Top Sheet (only C/O version is concerned); 

Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector 

G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; 

Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; 

Tip Protector 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; 


Tip Protector 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; 


Tip Protector 

Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; 


Tip Protector 

Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; 


Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; 


Tip Protector 

Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); 



Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); 





Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; 


Tip Protector 


Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base 







Tip Protector 









Tip Protector 




Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;

alpine SKi 

Maintenance & repairS 

Ski maintenance 

Good ski maintenance is just as important for the recreational skier as for the racer. A fine-tuned ski lasts 

longer. A well-prepared ski turns better, grips the snow better and glides better on all types of snow. 

the ski tune-up involves three steps: 

1. daily check-up - at the end of everyday of skiing. 

2. Machine tuning - for quick work. 

3. complete hand tuning - for skier’s specific needs. 

check-up 

• Visually check to see if any rust 

has developed on the edges. 

Machine tuning 

A S 

Stone grinding the ski base 

Surface Smoothing 

grinding 

rotation speed 

1000 t/mn 

pressure 2,5 

Ski feed speed 

10 m/mn 

dressing 

Dressing rate 

9 - 12 mm/s 

(depending on the condition of the ski) 

dressing speed 

Micro automatic 

(1300t/mn) 

Semi finishing 

grinding 


800 to 900 t/mn 

pressure 2,5 


10 m/mn 

dressing 

Dressing rate 

4 - 16 mm/s 


(1300 t/mn) 

• Remove any traces with fine, 

220-230 grit sandpaper. 

finishing 

grinding 


400 to 500 t/mn 

Minimum pressure 


10 - 11 m/mn 

dressing 

Dressing rate 

7 - 8 mm/s 


(1300 t/mn) 

Values from Wintersteiger machines (Micro 81 – Micro 91) or equivalent machines. 

Ski tuning on beveled/recessed edges 

parameter of the 

machine 

Beveled edge recessed edge 

program 1 angle 1° angle 1° 

Program from Wintersteiger machine (Trim Disc). 


• If necessary, sharpen and polish 

edges using sandpaper wrapped 

around a file. 

D Fa 

a) Surface smoothing 

– Place the skis on a flat surface. 

– Eliminate any excess polyethylene 

on the base with a hand base 

plane to decrease the risks of 

contaminating the stone. 

b) Semi finishing 

– Stone grind until the base becomes 

flat and glossy. 

– Avoid overheating and use of a 

dirty stone (lengthwise streaks on 

base are from stone contaminant). 

– Dress the stone regularly to keep 

it in good condition (when using a 

belt grinding machine: use 80 grit 

belt). 

edge finishing 

We recommend grinding the edges 

with a cup grinding wheel. fig. D 

• Check the angle adjustment beforehand. 

• Make sure the stones are well 

lubricated. 

• Make sure the edges are not 

burnt (brown color). 

• Check the tuning lengths. 

• Clean the base and wax with 

Swix wax. 

Ski check-up 

• Visually check to determine what needs to be tuned. 

• Remove major deep scratches on edges with whetstone (see page 44 for repairing). 

• Remove any traces of wax or grease. 

fill in any holes in the base 

(see base repairs on page 45) 

depending on the conditions of the base and materials available: 

a) Grind entire base surface. fig. A 

Stone grinding 

b) Fill-in scratches with base repair material. 

For Prolink skis, install the Binding-Bridge kit according to the 

c) Repair any large damaged areas with base patch/die. 

Maintenance Specifics paragraph on page 44. 

F 

b 

c) finishing fig. S 

– Stone grind to obtain a fine structure 

(when using a belt grinding 

machine: use 150 grit belt). 

– Do not use a dirty stone which 

creates fluff/hair. 

d) Beveled/recessed finish 

For skis with beveled/recessed finish, 

we recommend a straight, fine 

stone-ground structured base. 

note: always make the last run in this 

direc tion: Tip – Tail. Concerning 

the machine parame ters, consult 

the machine manufacturer. 

• Smooth the edges by hand with 

a soft stone (fig. Fa) or Scotch 

Brite ® (fig. Fb) 

• Make sure all burrs are removed 

and smooth down again, if necessary. 

for non equiped retailers they 

can do a classic tuning.

alpine SKi 

Maintenance & repairS (continued) 

Machine tuning (continued) 

G H J 

lateral finish (fig. G): 

• Lateral finishing with lubricated 

220 belt (or use the smallest grit 

possible). 

• Pass over the edges 1-2 times 

depending on the condition of the 

edges. 

• A double sided sharpener will 

maintain the ski’s proper side cut. 

• For a performance preparation, 

polish the base edge with a polish 

ing stone or whetstone to 

elim i nate any file marks on the 

edges. 

K L : 

Waxing, scraping and brushing 

a) Waxing (fig. K) 

- It’s best to use melted wax. 

- Clean the base thoroughly. 

- Make sure the iron is set at the appropriate 

temperature so that only 

the wax is melted. (Temperature 

110 °C +/- 5 °C or 230 °F +/- 

10 °F). 

hand tuning 

a true bar is the basic tool for 

checking and assessing: 

• ski base flatness, 

• that the edge is slightly recessed 

from the base, 

• the extent of base scratches and 

appropriate repair. The edge angle 

checking tool is used to verify 

that the edge has an angle of 90°. 

Ski check-up 

• Check the base and edges of your 

skis with a true bar. 

• If repairs are necessary, see instructions 

on page 45. 

cleaning the skis > Warning 

excess heat (above 120 °c or 248°f) 

can be harmful to both wax and ski, 

and can even cause permanent loss 

of glide qualities in the base. 

- Choose a wax according to the wax 

manu facturer’s recommendations. 

- Melt the selected wax over the entire 

length of the base, and let the 

wax cool to room temperature. 

Smoothing the base 

and edges (fig. D) 

classic finish: If damage is only minor, 

use a file to tune ; otherwise the 

ski must be tuned on a machine. 

Beveled/recessed finish: the 

recommended bevel is between 1° 

and 1.5°. 

edge sharpening (fig. D) 

• Sharpen base edges. 

• Sharpen side edges. 

on classic finish: make sure the 

edges are at 90°. 

Pressurized cleaners are prohibited, as well as the following solvents: 

› acetone 

› 95° alcohol 

(due to risk of damaging the cosmetics of the top surface of the ski). 


• Remove burrs and polish edges 

with a lubricated Scotch Brite ® 

belt machine at a slow speed. 

fig. J 

• Be careful to lubricate sufficiently 

to avoid burning the base. 

b) Scraping (fig. L) 

- Remove the excess wax with a 

plastic scraper from tip to tail to 

leave only a very thin layer. 

- Remove wax from the base groove 

and ski edges as well. 

c) Brushing (fig. :) 

- Brush the base with a nylon brush 

(or other type depending on the 

on Beveled/recessed finish: make 

sure that the beveled and recessed 

edge angle is between 1° and 1.5°. 

• Round off the tip and tail slightly. 

• Remove any burrs with soft stone 

or Scotchbrite ® . 

polishing the edges 

Polish the edges with a whetstone, 

starting first on the base and then 

the sides. 

Waxing, scraping and 

brushing 

Follow the same instructions as in 

machine tuning. 

tuning skis with prolink on automatically 

programmable machines 

and machines with a lead: 

To be able to tune skis with the Y 

and V prolink, we have developed 

a specific tuning kit in cooperation 

with the Wintersteiger company. 

• Carefully remove all burrs with a 

soft stone. 

• Quickly wipe the ski to avoid 

staining from the dried lubricant. 

a well-sharpened ski is always 

sharper underfoot than at the 

extremities of the ski. 

toolS: 

• Wax remover 

• Iron with thermostat 

• Wax applicator 

• Plastic scraper 

• Brush 

structure desired) working from tip 

to tail. 

- A rotating brush removes the structure 

of the base for good glide. 

Strap the skis together. Position the 

straps at the base contact points. 

note: The skis can be stored readywaxed 

(unscraped) for an extended 

period of time (e.g. between ski 

seasons). 

toolS: 

- Square 

- 20 cm (8 inch) 

file 

- Whetstone 

- Soft stone 

- Scrapers 

- Brushes 

de-tuning the edge angle at 

the extremities 

important: After all finishing operations 

(by hand or machine) it is 

essential to remove any burrs from 

edges and to polish the edges to 

ensure good ski performance. 

Maintenance specifics > prolink adapter 

- Scotchbrite ® 

- Sandpaper 

(220-320 grit) 

- Central holding 

vise 

- Swix wax 

This new Prolink adapter can 

be mounted on the adjustable 

Wintersteiger bridge (ref. 2000: 

7217-0111-V01) and is available at 

Wintersteiger under the reference 

7217-0111- V05.

alpine SKi 


repairing the surface of skis and snowblades 

A 

G 

L 

there are two methods for 

repairing the ski surface: 

1) ‘One colored’ paste + Araldite ® 

2) ‘Multi colored’ Araldite ® + white 

+ coloring 

repair process: 

1. With a cutter, outline the area 

to be repaired, then cut the top 

surface. fig. A 

2. Result after cutting the top surface. 

fig. S 

3. With a cutter, score area to repair 

(fibers) to improve bonding. 

fig. D 

4. To protect top surface, put adhesive 

tape around the area to 

repair. fig. F 

5. Prepare Araldite ® resin with gun. 

6. Which type of repair to choose: 

a) One-color surface repair 

b) Multicolored surface repair 

7. Add a small quantity of coloring 

paste to the Araldite ® resin. 

Gently mix (in order to avoid 

the tpp top surface 

All the adult and Rental models are 

protected by the TPP (Transparent 

Polyamide Protection). Regarding 

the Junior models, they are 

protected by TP (Transparent 

Protection). 

The transparent tops cover the 

cosmetics underneath, which 

guarantees the durability of the 

cosmetics. 

S 

H 

: 

bubbles) to obtain a homo geneous 

mixture. Add a small 

quantity of coloring paste (White 

DW 0131) to the Araldite ® resin. 

White paste is used as a primer 

in order to have the desired 

colors afterwards. Gently mix (in 

order to avoid bubbles) to obtain 

a homogeneous mixture. fig. G 

8. Apply thicker than top surface of 

the ski in the areas to be filled. 

Wait a few moments to eliminate 

bubbles if necessary. fig. H 

9. Put adhesive tape on the area to 

avoid running. Let it dry for 12 

hours. fig. J 

10. After 12 hours of drying, remove 

the adhesive tape from the mixture. 

Do not remove the adhesive 

tape around the area which 

protects the top surface from 

scratches. Use the flat side of a 

cutter to scrape off the excess 

mixture. fig. K 

Base repairs 

Superficial scratches 

Machine tuning will make the 

scratch disappear (see the ski maintenance 

repair) 


D 

J 

11 

11. Smooth it down with 600 grain 

sand paper. Remove the adhesive 

tape. fig. L 

12. Finish sanding gently in order 

to obtain a smooth surface. Be 

careful of the ski’s decor/cosmetics. 

create a decoration 

13. For the coloring stage, do not try 

creating tone on tone to create 

the exact color of the ski. Trying 

to reproduce a motif of the ski 

design already present elsewhere 

is better and easier. The 

final layer of Araldite ® tends to 

lighten colors. fig. : 

14. Use the Araldite ® gun for a 

varnish finish which will protect 

the ski surface from cuts from 

the edges. A small quantity of 

Araldite ® is sufficient. 

15. Apply a fine layer of Araldite ® 

with a cutter to avoid excessive 

thickness. fig. ● 11 

not very deep scratches or 

marks to be filled by machine 

- Pour the polyethylene. 

- Wait 10 minutes for the material 

to harden. 

- Remove the excess polyethylene 

with a steel spatula for a flat surface. 

- Proceed with machine tuning. 

F 

K 

12 

16. Using a dust-free cloth, wipe off 

the excess Araldite ® to obtain 

a smooth, even surface. Let it 

dry for 30 minutes. The repair is 

finished. fig. ● 12 

MaterialS needed: 

• Araldite ® 2011 

• Araldite ® gun 50 ml 

• Araldite ® coloring paste for 

smooth color (DW 0131 White, 

DW 0133 Red, DW 0137 Black, 

DW 0132 Yellow, DW 0134 Green, 

DW 0135 Blue) 

• White paste for undercoating 

for decoration (DW 0131 White) 

• Felt pen to color the design, 

type 3 points, permanent 

(Ref: Pantone 87828 - 

color number). 

acceSSorieS: 

• Cutter 

• Adhesive tape 

• Towel 

• Sand paper, Grain 600 

deep cuts 

- Cut out the damaged area with the 

base patch die. 

- Cut a piece of the base material 

with the base patch die. 

- Glue it into the damaged area. 

- Hold it in place with a clamp and 

press repair (glue the pieces with 

Loctite ® 406 or slow Araldite ® ). 

- Proceed with machine tuning.

alpine SKi 


replacing the tip protector 

A S D 

a 

F G H 

J 

b 

a 

b 

replacing edges 

A 

F 

repair process: 

1. Verify that the ski can be repaired. 

2. Remove the binding and clean 

the ski. 

3. Check the length of the edge to 

be replaced. fig. A 

Cut out the base where the 

edge must be changed (10 mm 

beyond) with the base patch die 

or cutter (in this case, make a 

reproducible cut-out). fig. S 

4. Cut the 2 sides of edges between 

two wings with 45° 

angle, as illustrated. 

5. Cut out the edge carefully with 

cutter or wood chisel, then 

roughen the area with 80 grit 

sandpaper. fig. D 

6. Cut the new edge, trim it and 

remove the grease. 

S 

G 

7. Place the new edge and screw 

2 wings near the tip. 

Wedge in place in order to 

maintain a good profile and 

keep the edge horizontal. 

fig. F 

8. Apply epoxy to affected area 

and heat slightly with heat gun, 

concentrating on each wing. 

9. Put plastic over cut out area 

and insert piece of new base 

material. 

10. Cover the affected area with 

mold release paper and place 

ski in heat press. fig. G 

11. When the epoxy has cured, 

remove the ski from the heat 

press and remove base patch 

and plastic film. 


2007/2008 rental tip protector 

“triangle” tip protector (fig. Aa). 

“hexagonal” tip protector 

(fig. Ab). 

1. Check that the tip protector is on 

the right position (Salomon logo 

on top foil side (fig. S). 

2. Set up the tip protector on the 

lateral groove with a rubber hammer 

(fig. D&F). 

3. Set up the tip protector on the 

central groove (fig. G). 

4. Finish the mounting on the second 

lateral groove with a rubber 

hammer (fig. H). 

D 

12. Reapply epoxy to the affected 

area. 

13. Carefully insert piece of base 

material into cut-out area. 

14. Cover affected area with mold 

release paper and place ski in 

heat press. 

15. When the epoxy has cured, 

remove the ski from the heat 

press. 

16. Grind base and edge locally. 

17. Plane patch area to obtain 

proper geometry with base 

plane or file. 

18. Repair any damage to top layer 

with a mixture of epoxy and 

colorant. 

19. Tune and wax the ski. 

others rental models use 

rental tip protector range 05 

”triangle” tip protector (fig. Ja). 

“hexagonal” tip protector 

(fig. Jb). 

1. Insert the tip protector on 

the ski. 

2. Place the 2 screws in the 2 holes 

face the running base and screw 

on (1N.m). 

MaterialS 

• screw (wood, 1,5 x 15 mm) 

• epoxy 

• epoxy colorant or methane glue 

• mold release paper or PE film 

• base patch die (KT Technic) 

• cutter, ruler 

• scale model drilling machine with 

cutting disc 

• narrow screwdriver 

• heat gun 

• wood chisel 

• repair press 200 mm length 

• base plane Wintersteiger, file 

• belt grinder 

• stone grinder 



S90190 Standard Salomon edges 

for all skis

Boot 

Technical reference 

for the complete 

line of current 

Salomon alpine 

boots 

Standard Boot norMS 

Standard Boot Sole dimensions > iSo 5355 

The Alpine boot soles are standardized and bindings are designed accordingly. 

The standard norm concerns not only the shape and dimensions as illustrated, but also the friction coefficient 

of the area of the sole which is in contact with the anti-friction plate on the binding. 

in practical terms: 

The boot manufacturers who display 

one of the following markings: 

DIN, ISO, ÖN, UNI guarantee that they 

use standard norms. 

In the absence of any of these, check 

first with the boot manufacturer. These 

boots are designed for use with a pair 

of classic skis, and not with a monoski, 

snowboard or skiboard. 

It is the skier’s own responsibility if (s) 

he chooses to take the additional risks. 

When a pair of used boots is brought 

in, make sure that any worn parts are 

still within the norm. 

adult boot Junior boot 

a 69 ± 2 62 ± 2 

B 70 65 

c 70 50 

d* 100 (L < 300 mm) 80 (L < 240 mm) 

120 (L 

1,5 

max. I H 

G 40 min. 

(side view) 

> = 300 mm) 90 (L > legend (measurements in mm) Boot heel 

= 240 mm) 

e 5 ± 1 3 ± 1 

f 19 ± 1 16.5 ± 1.5 

g 

h 

i 

30 ± 2 

30 ± 1 

4 ± 1 

25 ± 2 

27.5 ± 2 

3 ± 1 

ra 41.5 ± 3.5 35 ± 3 

rB 18 ± 1.5 16 ± 2 

rc 37 ± 4 27 ± 3 

rd 36.25 ± 0.75 34.5 ± 1 

*L = boot sole length 

Boot Modification 

Boot toe 

A 

RB 

RA 

B 

(bottom view) 

7 ± 1 

5 min. 

F 

E 

G 40 min. 

(side view) 

6 min. 

8 ± 1 

RD 

RC 

D C 

(bottom view) 

any performance or fit modification of a boot that could effect the function between the boot and binding should be inspected to verify that the 

boot meets Standard alpine Boot norms. Mechanical inspection is recommended after any such modification. 

47 

1,5 

max. 

A 

Photo: Christoffer Sjostrom. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.

Boot 

technical featureS 

Boot sole lengths 

last recap per concept 

Models 

95 mm 

Last 

98 mm 

Last 

rental: intelligent color coding 

standards & technIcal features > 48 

Mondopoint SiZeS 

ModelS 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

22 

22.5 

23 

23.5 

24 

24.5 

25 

25.5 

26 

26.5 

27 

27.5 

28 

28.5 

29 

29.5 

30 

30.5 

31 

31.5 

32 

32.5 

33 

33.5 

X3 laB 

X3 rc cS / X3 10 cS / 

275 285 295 305 315 325 

X3 cS / ghoSt / Shogun / 

poiSon / X3 Jr pro / X3 Jr 

265 274 285 295 305 315 326 336 

MiSSion rS / diVine rS 268 278 288 298 308 318 328 338 358 358 378 378 

MiSSion / diVine 268 277 288 298 307 317 328 339 350 360 

pro Model/Kaïd/Keira/ 

KaoS/Kreation 

267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337 

iMpact / idol / iMpact Jr 267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337 347 357 

charM 265 274 286 295 307 

focuS 267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337 357 357 

focuS gt 277 277 297 297 317 317 337 337 357 357 

X3 60 240 240 247 257 267 277 287 295 307 

t3 266 276 285 296 306 

t2 / team 240 240 247 259 

t1 208 208 223 223 

perforMa / irony 267 277 287 298 307 319 329 339 349 359 380 380 

SyMBio rental 263 275 284 296 306 317 326 336 345 

100 mm 

Last 

102 mm 

Last 

104 mm 

Last 

106 mm 

Last 

X3 LAB • 

X3 / Instinct Custom Shell 

Impact / Idol Custom Shell 

Mission RS / Divine RS • 

Mission / Divine • 

Charm • 

Quest • 

Focus • • • 

color coding per concept Size 

108 mm 

Last 

S 

A rental : global solution provider. 

available on all Salomon rental 

boots. 

Color Code Black Green Yellow Orange Red Purple Blue 

Boot Sole Lengths (mm) 260-273 274-288 289-304 305-318 319-334 335-348 349-384 

Impact/Idol 

Mission RS Divine RS 

Quest 

Focus RS/ RS W / Jp 

Mission/Divine 

Symbio 

Focus GT 

Warning! 1 shell length for 2 sizes 

22/22,5 

267 mm 

22/22,5 

267 mm 

22/22,5 

268 mm 

22/22,5 

263 mm 

22/22,5 

278 mm 

23/23,5 

277 mm 

22/22,5 

278 mm 

23/23,5 

277 mm 

23/23,5 

278 mm 

23/23,5 

275 mm 

22 

277 mm 

23/23,5 

278 mm 

24/24,5 

287 mm 

23/23,5 

288 mm 

24/24,5 

287 mm 

24/24,5 

288 mm 

24/24,5 

284 mm 

23 

277 mm 

24/24,5 

288 mm 

24 

297 mm 

25/25,5 

297 mm 

25/25,5 

298 mm 

24/24,5 

298 mm 

25/25,5 

297 mm 

25/25,5 

298 mm 

25/25,5 

296 mm 

25 

297 mm 

Color coding on the boots (fig. A) 

matches the Synchro Center toe 

piece markings (fig. S). 

26/26,5 

307 mm 

26/26,5 

308 mm 

25/25,5 

308 mm 

26/26,5 

307 mm 

26/26,5 

307 mm 

26/26,5 

306 mm 

26 

317 mm 

27/27,5 

317 mm 

27/27,5 

318 mm 

26/26,5 

318 mm 

27/27,5 

317 mm 

27/27,5 

317 mm 

27/27,5 

317 mm 

27 

317 mm 

28/28,5 

327 mm 

28/28,5 

328 mm 

27/27,5 

328 mm 

28/28,5 

327 mm 

28/28,5 

328 mm 

28/28,5 

326 mm 

29/29,5 

337 mm 

29/29,5 

336 mm 

28 

337 mm 

29/29,5 

338 mm 

28/28,5 

338 mm 

29/29,5 

337 mm 

29/29,5 

339 mm 

30/30,5 

347 mm 

30/30,5 

345 mm 

29 

337 mm 

30/30,5 

358 mm 

30/30,5 

357 mm 

30/30,5 

350 mm 

30 

357 mm 

31/31,5 

357 mm 

31/31,5 

358 mm 

31/31,5 

357 mm 

31/31,5 

360 mm 

31 

357 mm 

32/33,5 

378 mm

Boot 

SaloMon foot MeaSurer 

Warning, procedure, and recommendations 

Warning 

Salomon developed a foot mea sur er 

that will help you provide better customer 

service by being able to recommend 

the size that cor re sponds 

to the dimensions (length and 

width) of the skier’s feet. however, 

using the measurer can never replace 

trying on a boot. 

The volume fit can be measured in 

two dimensions. The morphology of 

the foot and physical sensitivity of 

each individual, according to his/her 

sports activities and level (comfort/ 

performance ratio), are also determining 

factors in the choice of size. 

The Salomon measurer can be used 

for all Salomon footwear products 

procedure 

1. Have your customer take off 

his/her shoes and make sure 

that he/she is wearing appropriate 

ski socks (size and thickness). 

2. With your customer standing 

up, legs parallel and knees 

slightly bent, make sure his/her 

heels and medial side of both 

feet are touching the sides of 

the measurer. 

3. Slowly move the length guide 

fig. A until it touches the tip 

of one foot. 

iMportant: When you are 

moving the black transversal 

length guide, make sure you 

don’t put any pressure on the 

toes when measuring the foot. 

All you need to do is to barely 

touch the end of the longest 

toe. Too much pressure on the 

toes could lead to errors in 

reading by a few millimeters. 

4. Read the size written vertically 

where the red line is in the window. 

fig. S 

For Mondopoint, you have to take 

the width into account in the following 

manner: if the length of 

the foot measured is situated in 

this zone, this means the foot 

measures between 260 mm and 

Maintenance recommendations 

(Alpine, X-C, Hiking, In-line skates, 

Snowboard) and takes into account 

the two fundamental dimensions of 

both feet. 

› The length (main measure ment) : 

it can be read directly on 5 international 

size scales (US men’s/ 

US women’s/ UK / EUR / 

Mondopoint). 

› The width in direct correlation 

with the length measured. The 

width measurement is partic u larly 

useful to refine the mea sure ment 

in Mondopoint because it orients 

the customer towards the .0 sizes 

(narrow feet) or .5 sizes (wide 

feet). 

269 mm. Then, to choose between 

26.0 and 26.5, you must look at 

the width scale fig. D (in this 

case, make it correspond to the 

maximum foot width with size 26). 

A foot that measures 261 mm 

would fit in size 26.5 (wide foot), 

whereas a foot that measures 268 

mm can fit in size 26.0 (narrow 

foot). fig. F 

note: The increases in 

Mondopoint sizes represented by 

two triangles in a rectangle is made 

to remind you that the boot sole 

lengths change at the whole sizes, 

not the half sizes. 

remember that the size 

indicated on the measurer 

should be used to help the 

dealer orient the customer 

towards the proper size. 

The final choice as to the appropriate 

size should be left to the customer 

depending on whether he/ 

she prefers a snug fit or not. 

In principle, a technical skier who 

appreciates a snug fit will choose 

the size indicated on the measurer, 

while a ‘recreational’ skier will 

prefer a roomier fit and will choose 

one size higher. 

Use a damp cloth to clean the measurer. It is prohibited to use chemical 

agents, hot water, pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents, solvents 

or aerosols, which could permanently damage the plastic materials 

and erase the marks. 

salomon foot measurer > 49 

A 

F 

D 

S 

the new Salomon SidaS Measurer 

This measurer allows measures of: 

• Length: real Mondopoint/french sizes/UK sizes/US sizes 

• Floating width in mm with the integration of the cos18 factor to 

extrapolate the length first head/fifth head. 

• Precision: +/- 3 mm 

• No care

Boot 

adVanced fit technology liner 

technical description 

thermoforming 

thermoformable zones: 

A Straight and anatomical 

tongue 

- A thermoformable internal side 

that provides precision and 

comfort. 

- An external side that is more 

rigid on the tibia and more supple 

in the flex area for excellent 

pressure distribution without 

hindering flex. 

S opened ankle area 

For ideal morphological adaptation 

regardless of the size and 

shape of the bones. 

non-thermoformable zones: 

D asymmetrical and rigid cuff 

Distributes pressure for instanta 

neous transmission of efforts. 

layer construction 

external layer 

Middle layer 

internal layer 

internal layer for foot hold: 

For warmth and comfort 

- Polyurethane (PU), open cell foam 

envelopment, breathability, 

comfort 

High density CustomFit foam for superior 

envelopment. 

Women’s specific features 

F 

S 

A 

D 

J 

F 

A 

Middle layer: For foot envelopment 

and power transmission 

- Thermoformable PE (CustomFit) or 

self-molding PU (Autofit)or preformed 

PE (Thermic Fit) 

suppleness 

Transmission foam coming from the 

Neoprene family for quick reactions. 

external layer for contact with the 

shell: For pressure distribution and 

thermal insulation 

- Polyethylene, closed cell foam: insulation, 

warmth, lightness, better fit 

- PVC (Thermic + Rental): protection, 

ruggedness, durability 

- Sensifit cuff construction for envelopment 

of the leg 

- Supple exterior for contact with the 

shell and foot envelopment 

- Anatomical tongue 

Women’s liner with anatomic 

tongues made of highly moldable 

foams for better shin and instep 

comfort in sensitive foot zones. 

A Sliding band 

Helps the heel slide in. 

S Specific tongue 

Autofit and CustomFit foams for 

better shin and forefoot comfort. 

D My customfit performance 

For a total CustomFit. 

F polar fleece and/or fur 

Forefoot warmth. 

G therm-ic 

G 

D 

S 

H 

F Watertight gusset 

G Specific cuts for women and 

men to avoid pressure points 

on the lower calf. 

H More supple zones allow for 

easy entry/exit of the boot. 

J forefoot – The space in front 

of the metatarsal is not thermo 

formable, which allows the 

toes to move freely. 

liner Models 

new customfit generation 

My customfit World cup: 

Best performance. Extra low 

volume Compact Race liner (3 

layers). Specific World Cup tongue 

allowing shock absorbing. 

My customfit race: 

Best performance. Low volume 

Compact Race liner (3 layers). 

Rigid sole. 

My customfit performance: 

Better comfort on the heel, metas 

& sole without altering performance. 

Two layers liner: thermoformable 

foam 80 % on all sensitive 

areas (heel + metas + sole). 

old customfit generation 

course cf pro / customfit pro: 

CustomFit technology + bi-material 

technology. 100 % foot hold 

and contact with the shell. Due 

to a specific 3 layer performance 

construction. 

3d customfit / customfit: 

Comfort, warmth and ‘customized’ 

envelopment. Thermoformable 

foams allow the liner to take on the 

shape of the foot after a heating 

procedure is performed with a 

special machine designed by 

Salomon. + Thermoformable insole 

(3D CustomFit) 

autocf: Automoulding foam in the 

foot envelopment for exceptional 

comfort. CustomFit tongue for a 

better tibial customization. 

Xfit and Biovent 

Xfit active: A comfortable, single 

layer constructed thermo moldable 

liner with customizable tongue 

area for shin comfort and a wide 

ankle area, positioned at the back 

of the leg, for heel lock. 

Xfit advanced: A comfortable, 

single layer constructed thermo 

moldable liner with customizable 

tongue area for shin comfort. The 

wide ankle area positioned at the 

back of the leg and metas covers 

all the critical foot comfort zones. 

Xfit comfort: A comfortable, 

single layer constructed thermo 

moldable liner with a customizable 

tongue area for shin and ankle 

comfort. 

advanced fIt > 50 

My customfit Sport: Better customization 

of the tibia and ankles. 

One layer liner: thermoformable 

foam 70 % on original areas. 

My customfit comfort: Better 

tibial customization. One layer liner: 

thermoformable foam 60 % on basic 

area (tongue). 

autofit: Comfort, warmth, 

insulation and personalized foot 

envelopment. Self-molding foams 

allow the liner to take on the shape 

of the foot allowing anatomical 

adaptation of the foot’s sensitive 

areas: the tibia, ankle, forefoot and 

anklebones. 

thermicfit: Comfort and warmth 

- Pre-formed zones protect the tibia 

and the forefoot. 

- A pleasure to slip into due to its 

construction and materials. 

Biovent: The very first breathable 

liner in a ski boot to keep feet 

warm all day. This technology 

helps regulate body temperature 

thanks to a multilayer construction 

inspired from apparel.

Boot 


adVanced fit technology liner > (continued) 

thermoforming machine > procedure 

Before using the machine for the first time, return the guarrantee card to your Customer Service 

Representative. Follow the instructions for the thermoforming machine closely and pay particular attention 

to the rules on safety. 

To guarantee good thermoforming, we have adapted a thermal sensor to our machines. If something is 

abnormal during the heating process, the machine will work alternately. If this is the case, contact the customer 

service in your country. Do not take the machine apart. 

this machine is for exclusive use with Salomon cuStoMfit liners. any other use is forbidden. 

preparing for use (fig. A-S) 

A 

1. Remove the machine from its 

box and place it on a flat surface. 

Verify that the voltage 

used is the same as indicated 

on the machine. 

2. Lift the hood. 

Starting the machine 

D 

Set the timer for 15 mins. 

Warning: For optimal results, it is 

important that: 

- the heating process lasts 

15 minutes. Using the machine 

for more than 15 mins can damage 

the liner. 

- operate the machine with both 

boots in place. 

putting the boot on 

1. When thermoforming, you 

should only use ski socks that 

have the following characteristics: 

- socks that go higher than 

the top of the boot, 

- socks with at least 45% wool. 

S 

3. Lift the nozzles using the handles 

provided. 

4. Close the boot’s buckles and 

slide the boots onto the nozzles. 

Make sure that the top 

edge of the boot touches the 

obturator. 

F 

Wearing normal, low-cut socks 

could cause skin reactions to 

the heating process. 

2. Remove the boots from the machine. 

3. Close the hood. 

4. The machine is now available 

for thermoforming another pair 

of boots. 

5. Open the boot buckles. 

6. The boots must be put on immediately 

following the end of 

the 15 min heating cycle. 

if you feel any discomfort 

whatsoever when stepping-in, 

take your boots off immediately. 

important: any insoles used 

other than the ones received 

in the boots at the time of 

purchase should be removed 

before the heating procedure 

begins. re-install them after 

heating to mold the liners. 

G 

Warning 

Salomon customfit liners should only be heated for molding 

using the Salomon customfit Machine. any other unit may 

cause injury by overheating. 

7. Close the buckles with medium 

pressure, not too tight. fig. D 

8. Close the strap more firmly. 

9. Tap the heel on the floor to 

make a good impression of the 

Achilles’ heel. fig. F 

10. Wait 10 min in a standing position. 

11. Remove the boots. 

practical advice 

› Salomon recommends that no 

CustomFit liner be thermoformed 

more than three times. 

› To optimize the results of the 

thermoforming process, it is 

recommended that you make 

several flex movements during 

5. After having read and understood 

the machine’s instructions, 

especially those on 

safety, you can now plug the 

machine in. 

the 10 minute cooling process 

to simulate the anklebone movements 

when skiing. fig. G 

› It is recommended to wait 

1/2 hour before skiing with the 

boots, to allow for complete stabilization 

of the thermoformed 

liner. 

drying with a machine 

When drying the CustomFit liners 

with a drying machine, it is important 

to respect the drying time 

recommended by the manufacturer 

and that the temperature not exceed 

40°c.

Boot 

cuStoM Shell technology 

custom Shell thermal forming 

S 

H 


A new patented Kaprolene material has been inserted on the shell of the boot near the metatarsal area. 

Simply heat the shell, step in and allow the shell to form to the contours of the feet. This personalized fit 

gives unprecedented precision for improved on snow performance. 

customization procedure 

A 

G 

L 

We recommend the use of the Sidas 

bootfitting oven fig. A. Make sure the 

customer uses only ski socks which go 

higher than the top of the boot. 

1. Remove liners from shells. 

2. Put the shells in the oven with 

buckles open fig. S. 

: 

3. Close the door and start the 

machine, set the timer for 10 

minutes. Warning: Make sure 

to wear insulated gloves when 

removing boot shells. Do not allow 

customers to touch the boot, 

avoiding possible burns. 

4. Switch off the oven and remove the 

shells. 

5. Put liners back in. 

6. Help the customer to step in fig. D. 

recommendations for experienced Bootfitters 

You can use your regular heating tools 

though they would be less practical 

than the oven: 

• heating elements fig. K. 

• gun fig. L. 

• boiling water fig. :. 

Warning: Kaprolene has been created 

to be deformed by the foot’s natural 

pressure. Be very careful if you need 

to use a pushing machine on the 

Kaprolene areas and NEVER push 

on the sides areas where Kaprolene 

meets the PU shell. 

D 

J 

7. Close the boots with minimum 

tightening (first tooth of the buckle) 

and make sure the forefoot shell 

seals stay in the right position. 

Warning: Ask your customer to 

stand still. Avoid bending or walking 

with warmed shells. 

8. Make sure the shell has been 

fully deformed before starting 

the cooling process. (It takes 

approximately 2 min). 

F 

K 

9. Cool the boots: in cold water for 6 

minutes (level of water: above the 

seal) fig. F. Warning: Water level 

should not be higher than forefoot 

shell seals to avoid getting liners wet. 

- with cold packs for 6 minutes 

fig. G. 

- in snow for 6 minutes fig. H. 

- naturally for 20 minutes fig. J. 

10. Take boots off, the Custom Shell 

boot is ready.

Boot 

cuStoM Shell technology > (continued) 

custom Shell faQ 

can the shell change forms several 

times? As many times as you 

want! The wider the foot, the more 

the shell will expand. But it won’t 

come back… 

from what foot width will the 

custom Shell be useful? In size 

26, from last 100 or 102 mm, the 

customer will feel a real difference. 

The Custom Shell is also useful for 

thinner feet in order to reposition 

the foot even if the change is not 

measurable on the shell. 

What is the maximum width the 

shell can expand to? Up to 6 mm 

with the push of the foot only. 

What is the advantage compared 

to normal bootfitting? Here, it is 

the foot which changes the shell, 

there is no more risk of misinterpretation, 

the precision is perfect. 

Also, this process saves time (30 

min. to do everything & the customer 

leaves with his/her boots) 

and an easier manipulation (every 

KOTF can do it). 

Should the custom soles be done 

before or after? Mold the soles 

before. The customer should then 

step in the warmed Custom Shell 

with the insoles. 

Should other areas of the shell be 

changed before or after? A modification 

of the metatarsus’s area 

can affect the positioning of the 

foot. First, the Custom Shell should 

be complete. Then, the areas of the 

toes, ankles, and navicular bone... 

can be changed as usual, though 

avoid pushing on the borders of 

the Custom Shell insert. 

can i push in the custom Shell 

area with my bootfitting machine? 

Yes, but it is not recommended. 

Since the Custom Shell 

material has not been created to 

resist to a push that is superior the 

feet’s push, avoid the side areas of 

the insert. 

thermolight Quest pro pebax liner formatting > procedure 

1. Put on the client’s boots at 

room temperature. The client 

must have the sensation of 

tightness in the shell. 

2. Identify possible painful areas 

(pressure points) 

3. Protect those areas by applying 

cut foam pads (not included) 

directly on the foot, not the 

sock. 

- Be careful not to take off or 

move the pads when putting 

the socks back on. 

4. Put the Thermolight liner without 

insoles in the custom Shell 

oven for 10 minutes at 100°C 

max (preferably pre-heated) 

5. At the end of 10 minutes, add 

insoles (original, custom or 

orthopedic) in the liner and put 

them into the shell. 

- Take care to insert the right 

liner in right shell and vice 

versa (the liners aren’t 

marked but differentiated only 

by the shape of the sole!) 

advice: prepare one foot at a 

time (preserve the liner not yet 

fitted in the oven) 

6. Put on the client, taking care 

to push the client’s heel all the 

way down to the liner to correctly 

set the heel on the bottom 

and thus avoid creating 

bends. 

7. Tighten the Quick Lace 

8. Fasten the shell starting with 

the forefoot buckle and making 

sure to lock the backbone in the 

action position. 

9. Provide a clamping adapted to 

the morphology of the foot: 

- Strong (2nd, 3rd and 4th 

tooth) for a wide foot 

- Low (1st, 2nd and 3rd tooth) 

for a thiner foot 

repeat the same operation for 

the second liner 

10. Cool down 15 minutes at room 

temperature and in a natural 

standing position, without exaggerating 

the bending on the 

front. 

does the plastic retract the same 

as normal boots when cooled? 

Yes, but two times less than normal 

plastic: approximately 25% 

after the boots have been taken 

out (a shell pushed out 4mm could 

come back to 3 mm). 

What is the benefit of custom 

Shell versus the custom fit? 

Should you do it before or after? 

The work done on the shell must 

be done before. This will solve 

problems and last over time. The 

molding of the liner must be done 

after in order to put the finishing 

touches on the fit. 

how do i know when the plastic 

is warm enough? It is the same 

process as usual when done with a 

manual test. 

What is the ideal temperature to 

form the custom Shell? 80°C at 

core of the plastic. 

how many years of r&d did it 

take to develop the custom Shell 

technology? 3 years. 


Which is the impact of the new 

material on the performance of 

the boot? There is no effect because 

the material has the same 

PU base as a normal boot. The 

boot has exactly the same behavior 

on snow. On the other hand, once 

a boot is fit with the Custom Shell, 

precision is increased. 

if a customer wants an injected 

liner, should it be done before or 

after? In general, injection is done 

before work on the shell. 

i usually put normal boots in the 

oven, how is custom Shell different? 

The normal plastic is going to 

change very little and comes back 

to the original position more often. 

The deformation is thus quite low. 

Why is custom Shell not used in 

World cup? In World Cup races, 

one person is dedicated to each 

racer; everything is done by hand 

and each pair is adapted to each 

discipline. Then you could say 

having Custom Shell is like having 

your own race technician! 

note: Salomon does not recommend the use of the Custom Fit machine (or any other similar machine) because 

it does not allow an acceptable and effective Thermolight liner process.

Boot 

SaloMon Boot technologieS 

tool free catches adjustment 

Upper catches are also adjustable, with or without tools, to adapt 

the volume of the upper cuff to your calves. 

- To move upper catches, turn 

them 90°, move them laterally 

(+ 15mm), then place them 

back to their horizontal position. 

- To move lower catches, 

loosen the screw with a 3mm 

Allen wrench, position the 

catches in the desired position 

(+/- 20mm) and tighten 

the screw. 

Buckle teeth adjustment 

Offers a greater range of lower 

leg adjustment (+/- 20 mm): 

- Loosen the screw with a 3 

mm Hexagonal Key. 

- Re-tighten the screw and 

buckle teeth in the new 

position. 

Micro Buckle adjustment 

1 2 3 

Fine tune the buckle closure by turning the part that grips the buckle teeth. 

extended lever Buckles 

Extended lever 

buckles require 

30% less effort 

when closing. 

Walkadin pads 

Walking is easy and safe, skiing 

is compatible with alpine DIN 

standards. 

Boot technologIes > 54 

canting adjustment (With lock) 

+2.5 

+1.5 +3.5 

The Canting is integrated into the 

shell for reliable transmission and 

protection. It allows alignment of 

the cuff to the skier’s lower leg 

shape. 

- The factory preset position for the 

canting is + 2,5° 

- First, loosen the internal and 

external Canting Lock with the 

Hexagonal Key n° 5. 

- To adjust inwards to + 1,5° 

(a knock kneed stance), turn the 

external adjuster one-half turn.* 

3d Buckle adjustment 

The 3D buckle adjustment allows the 

position of the instep buckle to be 

changed for personalised foot hold: 

- Unscrew the buckle with a 3 mm 

Hexagonal Key. 

- Position the buckle over the plastic 

lug on the shell. 

- Re-tighten in the alternate position. 

auto 3d Buckle adjustment 

Without using any tools, the Auto 

3D buckle adjustment modifies 

the position of the instep and/or 

lower leg buckle to personalize 

foothold: 

- To adjust externally to + 3,5° 

(a bow legged stance), turn the 

internal adjuster one-half turn.* 

- Re-tighten the canting lock. 

*note: Never turn both the internal 

and external adjustments as this will 

raise the whole cuff without adjusting 

the canting. 

a 

c 

- Lift the buckle up a 

- Hold the lock down b 

- Move the buckle to the desired 

position c 

- Release the lock d 

b 

d

Boot 

Boot conceptS 

ghost/pro Model 

19 

10 

18 

17 

16 

20 

technical deScription – ghoSt & pro Model 

Loop to tongue 

Shin pillow 

Quicklace 

Wide strap 

Leather finishing 

X3 / X3 laB 

SCS (Salomon 

Cushioning System) 

Walkable sole 

2 densities heel 

cushioning system 

Boot concePts > ghost/sPk & ImPact > 55 

13 

15 14 21 

technical deScription – X3 laB 

World Cup Advanced 

Shell technology 

World Cup shell 

Last 95 

Racing Kit 

Pu either lower shell 

and cuff 

Flex 120 or 130 

My Custom Fit World 

Cup liner 

adjustments and personalization 

World cup claw strap 

- Increases cuff fastening: a more 

powerful fastening for a better envelopment 

than a traditional strap. 

- More reliable: it can’t open while 

flexing the boot (both before and 

during the curve). 

3 

A1 

PU lower shell and PP 

cuff 

Micro alu overshaped 

buckles 

Extra padded spoiler 

World Cup claw strap 

45mm 

Back bone 

Double dismantable 

canting 

Back bone 

- Increases the junction between 

cuff & shell for flex management 

in a forward position: entering the 

curve, increasing power on skis. 

- Provide support and power to 

skiers in a rear position while 

getting out of the curve (rebound 

effect): the more powerful the rebound 

the more back support you 

need to control your skis. 

12 

11 

10 

8 

9 

My CF PRO liner with 

faux fur 

Nailed strap 

Insole rubber grip 

Absorbing footboard 

4 

5 

6 

7 

PU lower shell 

Double dismountable 

canting 

Backbone 

Cuff hytrel by Dupont 

2 

4 

2 

3 

5 

A1 

My Custom Fit 

Performance liner 

Custom shell 

D 

A 

6

Boot 

Boot conceptS > (continued) 

X3 cS / instinct cS / X3 rc cS / X3 10 cS / X3 Jr pro / X3 Jr 

13 

6 

4 

G 

9 

2 

11 

technical deScription – X3 rc cS 

Racing Kit 

Flex 130 

World Cup advanced 

shell technology 

My CF Race Sensitive 

liner. 

Sensifit liner wings. 

concePts > falcon/InstInct/gun/scarlet > 56 

Lower shell and cuff 

Energyzer 

Canting adjustment. 

Canting Lock. 

World Cup claw 

strap. 

3D buckle. 


race Kit 

Shin plate (fig. A) 

Used to reinforce the forward support and 

stiffens the flex. The height and lateral 

position are adjustable. 

- Choose the forward or internal position 

and use a 5,5 mm drill bit to drill the 1st 

hole in the cuff where marked (the shin 

plate is marked by a cross inside the cuff 

of the boot). 

- Choose the desired height and attach the 

plate using the “T” insert and bolts provided. 

- Align the plate correctly and use as a guide 

to drill the 2nd hole and attach as shown. 

D 

J 

: 

K 

Custom Sole 

Adjustable buckle 

teeth 

Micro adjustable 

buckle 

Custom Shell 

Backbone 

4 

G 

1 12 

1 

A 

S 

D 

rear spoiler (fig. S) 

The rear spoiler (from the performance 

kit) increases rear support (with 3 height 

settings) and forward lean by + 2°. 

- Choose the desired height and attach 

using the screw provided, in the predrilled 

hole. 

delta h lift (fig. D) 

The 4 mm heel lift (from the performance 

kit) can be used to improve instep/heel 

hold and put the skiers weight forward 

for faster initiation. Remove the liner and 

position the wedge in the hole provided in 

the rear of the Custom Sole. 

2 

L 

technical deScription – X3 Jr pro 

World Cup advanced 

shell technology 

My CF Pro liner 

Sensifit liner wings. 

Lower shell and cuff 

Energyzer 

Softening the Boot 

Even if the flex is more progressive than 

with tradtional racing boots, it can be 

soften further more: 

reversible Method: Remove the canting 

lock screws. This reduces the flex by 

5-10 %. Place the plugs from the Racing 

kit into the screw holes on the outer cuff. 

non reversible Method: This involves 

cutting the ‘V’ in the top rear of the lower 

shell and should be performed by your 

specialized Salomon dealer. 

Canting adjustment. 

360° 35mm strap 

3D buckle. 


teeth 

D 

H 

K 

J 


buckle 

additional featureS 

custom Sole Standard 




canting adjustment 

54 Salomon Boot Technologies 

60 Performance Accessories

Boot 


Mission rS / divine rS 


A S 

for a perfect fit 

Sensifit fig. A 

A soft material over the instep for 

improved envelopment and easier 

step-in. 

adjustable Women spoiler fig. S 

- To move the spoiler, turn the 

screw 180° with a 5mm Allen 

wrench. 

Biovent liner 

The very first breathable liner in 

a ski boot to keep feet warm all 

day. This technology helps regulate 

body temperature thanks to 

a multilayer construction inspired 

from apparel. 

Mission / divine 


romavable rear Spoiler 

You remove it by clipping 



two extended lever Buckles 



60 Performance Accessories 

technical deScription – MiSSion 6 

Sensifit liner wings 

Strap 

Tool free catch 

adjustment 

3D sensifit 

Pads 

Wings sole 

technology 


buckle 

Boot concePts > mIssIon & dIvIne > 57 



two extended lever Buckles 





Removable spoiler 

X Fit Fusion 

Advanced liner 

9 

7 

H 

technical deScription – MiSSion 12 

Loop on tongue 

Wide strap 


adjustment 

8 

7 

8 

9 

5 

5 

Spaceframe shell 

profile second skin 

last and shell 

Pads 

Canting 

1 

F G 


buckles 

My Custom Fit Pro 

liner Biovent 

Dismantable flex rivet 

A 

H G 

2 

D 

S 

D 

F

Boot 


imapct / idol 

adjustments and personalization > procedure 

A S 

for a perfect fit 

Sensifit (fig. A) 

A soft material over the instep for 

improved envelopment and easier 

step-in. 

for a preciSe tranSMiSSion 

adjustable rear Spoiler (fig. S) 

Customisation of the rear support to 

suit the shape and size of the skier’s 

leg and increase the rear support: 

- Loosen the screw with a 5 mm 

Hexagonal Key, 

- Choose the height (the higher the 

spoiler, the stronger the rear support), 

- Tighten the screw. 

charm 


A 

D F 

WalK 

SKi 

adjustable rear spoiler fig. A 

Customize the rear support to suit 

the shape and size of your leg and 

increase the rear support: 

- Loosen the screw with a 5mm 

Allen wrench. 

- Choose the height (The higher 

the spoiler the stronger the 

rear support). 

- Tighten the screw. 

oversize Sensifit fig. S 

The Oversize Sensifit, designed 

with supple material, offers easy 

entry/exit and an optimum level 

of comfort. 

S 

Boot concePts > ImPact & charm > 58 


Walkadin pads 







Ski/Walk adjustment fig. D 

The easy-to-use SKI/WALK button 

releases the cuff for relaxing 

and easy walking. (Push the button 

down for the WALK position) 

Step in strap fig. F 

The Step-in strap offers the possibility 

to put the boot on effortlessly, 

with only one hand. 


Walkadin pads 





technical deScription – iMpact 10 cS 

7 

5 

8 

4 

10 

9 

8 

7 

Sensifit liner wings 

Wide strap 


teeth 

3D articulated buckle 

Walkadin pads 

6 

11 

technical deScription – charM 7 

Wide strap 


adjustment 

Walkadin pads 

5 

H 12 G 

Spaceframe shell 

profile second skin 

last and shell 

Lower shell and 

cuff energyzer 

Canting 

3 

Ski/walk position 


buckle 

Warmest liner 

A 

Canting lock 


buckle 

My CF Pro 

Custom Shell 

A 

S 

D 

F 

S 

Thermic prepared 

Auto calf adjustment

Boot 


Quest 12/Quest pro pebax 

7 

10 

2 

13 

9 12 

16 

8 

3 3 

4 

4 

5 6 1 11 

1 

technical deScription – QueSt 12 & QueSt pro peBaX 

Last 100 

Cushioning system 

(tongue and heel pad) 

Magnesium backbone 

a unique & patented ride & hike technology 

A 

D 

new Body positioning 

forward lean (fig. G) 

Quest 12 boots offer 15.1° forward 

lean, while Quest Pro Pebax offers 

13.5° forward lean. The result is 

better balance in powder and track 

up snow. 

Ride & Hike body 

postioning 

Alpine Touring pads 

S 

F 

15.1° 

Contagrip extended 

rubber sole 

My CustomFit Pro 

liner + Biovent 

G 

Boot concePts > Quest > 59 

Forward pressure 

plate 

Quicklace kit 

Racing spoiler 

alpine Back Support Management 

The magnesium backbone, technology 

from the X3 LAB (fig. A), 

provides strong back support, 

power transmission and progressive 

forward flex management 

when skiing down (fig. S). 

alpine forward flex Management 

The specific inner shell (V cut-out) 

(fig. D) guarantees a wide cuff 

opening when hiking or walking 

(fig. F). Combined with the inside 

part of the magnesium backbone, 

cuff opening (fig. H) 

Quest 12 boots have a 30° cuff 

opening, offering easier hiking due 

to a more natural leg positioning 

and a wide cuff opening on the 

back when walking. 

Touring Pads 

Quicklace 

Ultralight 

Thermoformable liner 

14 

15 

Waterproof gusset 

Pebax lower shell 

Polylight cuff 

contributes to back support and 

progressive forward flex. 

30° 

H

Boot 


Quest 12/Quest pro pebax (continued) 

Mountain pros 

Boot concepts 

ultralight skin shell (fig. A) 

Second skin shell. 

Women specificities 

• PP Women cuff 

• Women light back calf 

• Specific liner: my Customfit 

Comfort liner. 

Quicklace replacement Kit 

contagrip extended rubber shell 

(fig. S) 

Contagrip® extended rubber sole. 

Waterproof gusset 

to guarantee a perfect waterproofness. 


interchangeable Sole pads 

• Switch from DIN (Alpine) to touring pads 

• Easy to remove & fully compatible with all the standard 

compliant bindings on the market 

• Contagrip® material with deep studs for a perfect 

arch grip in all walking conditions 

If you change the pads, you have to use bindings 

associated with the appropriate standard: ISO 5355 

(alpine standard) or ISO 9523 (touring standard). 

ultralight thermoformable liner 

• 280 g (for a size 26,5 boot) 

• Heat moldable for a perfect foothold 

S F 

A D 

upper Buckle Walk position 

hook: For a better walk position, 

you can catch the upper buckle in 

the first position (red one) (fig. D) 

adaptable leash: if needed, you 

can add a leash on your boots. A 

specific buckle has been added on 

the forefoot zone (fig. F) 



rear Spoiler 


60 Performance Accessories

Boot 


Quest 12/Quest pro pebax (continued) 

procedure > Strap replacement 

A 

A 

S 

Strap replacement 

1. Remove the rear Perf hold to access rivets (fig. A) 

2. Drill rivets with a Ø 5.2 drill (fig. S) 

3. Assemble new strap + plate with inserts and screws M4 (fig. D-G) 

4. Attach the rear Perf hold (fig. H) 

procedure > cover replacement 

S 

remove the cover and toe buckle teeth 

1. Drill toe buckle teeth rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (fig. A) 

2. Drill cover rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (fig. S) 

reassemble the new cover + fuel racks 

3. Drill the buckle teeth shell + cover Ø 5.4 to put the M4 insert (fig. D-F) 

attach the cover and the buckle teeth with insert with M4 screw 

4. The insert must be flush with buckle teeth mounted on cover (fig. G) 

5. Mount the cover buckle teeth with M4 screws (fig. H) 

Backbone replacement 

Mounting kit (fig. A) 

1. Remove the damaged axis by cutting off the reveting part (fig. S) 

2. Place the 2 springs in their cavities (fig. D) 

3. Do not forget to put the steel pin before screw and nut (fig. F) 

4. Mount the new backbone (fig. G) 


procedure > Backbone replacement 

A 

S D 

F 

D 

G 

D 

G 

F 

H 

F 

H 

G

Boot 


focus 

technical deScription – focuS rS 

PU materials to prevent 

scratches 

Aluminium buckles for 

lasting 

Liner: mesh tested and 

chosen to ensure long 

lasting comfort. Biovent: 

less time needed to dry 

liner on the shelves 

Symbio rental Model 

SyMBio 440 

Plastic buckles 

PU Shell 

Replaceable toe and heel pads 

repairs > procedure 

replacing the lower leg buckle 

tooth insert 

1. Remove the liner and open the 

cuff completely. 

2. Drill the rivet inside the shell. 

3. Remove the damaged buckle 

tooth insert and its rivet. 

4. Put a new buckle tooth insert in 

place and proceed as follows : 

using a t-nut 

a. Place the threaded insert in 

the rivet hole on the inside of 

the boot. 

Adjustable lower leg lever 

Thermic liner 

Bar code integrated to the liner 


A 

lower leg adjustment 

It is possible to change the lower 

leg adjustment according to the 

morphology of the skier’s lower 

leg. 

Soles: build to last and 

to avoid folding with 

textured effect (Salomon 

patented) Kit 

Oversize tool free 

catch 

2 buckle fastening 

My AutoCustomShel 

liner + Biovent 


auto custom Shell: comfort solution technology 

• Directly derived from our Custom 

Shell technology 

• Auto Custom Shell is 100% 

comfort oriented, providing 

comfort benefits with no process 

• Last evolution from 104 to 108 

• Insert are derivated from PU, 

same durability 

Articulated sensift for 

step-in 

Auto Custom Shell 

technology 

Rental plate for 

barcode 

› adjusting the lower leg cable 

- Place the lower leg cable in the 

desired setting of the buckle 

teeth on the medial side of the 

boot. (fig. A) 

Longer or shorter cables are available 

from the spare parts catalog 

(page 70) to adapt to all shapes 

and sizes. 



b. Put the buckle into place and 

install the screw tightly. The 

prongs on the threaded insert 

should be completely imbedded 

into the cuff material. 

c. Loosen the screw. 

d. Put the washer into place. 

This will prevent the tip of the 

screw from going too far. 

e. Tighten completely. 

using a rivet. Use a rivet on the 

outside and a washer inside and 

proceed with riveting. 

Boot concePts > symBIo > 62 

3 

6 

6 

3 2 

3 

replacing the buckle and/or forefoot 

buckle teeth 

1. Remove the liner. 

2. Drill the rivets in the buckle or 

the damaged buckle teeth. 

3. Remove the damaged buckle or 

the buckle teeth and the rivet. 

Save the washer. 

4. Put in a new buckle or buckle 

teeth and attach with a rivet or 

T-nut. 

using a rivet. Use a new rivet 

and the original washer and proceed 

with riveting. 

5 

5 

4 

1 

A 

F 

S 

using a t-nut. Put the threaded 

insert into the rivet hole from the 

inside of the boot. Put the buckle 

in place and tighten completely. 

The prongs on the threaded insert 

should be completely imbedded 

in the material. 

to remove the liner 

Turn the clip on the inside of the 

liner 1/4 turn with a screwdriver.

Boot 

foot anatoMy and fit 

notions of anatomy 

A basic knowledge of anatomy of the foot is essential if you are going to understand and solve your customers’ 

problems and needs since each foot is unique. 

the bones of the foot 

types of legs 

distortion of foot when weighted 

When the foot is weighted (standing 

position), it can change in size: 

- lengthwise, it can get 5 mm longer, 

- widthwise, it can get 12 mm wider. 

When the foot is flexed, we notice: 

- the circumference of the ankle increases 

about 2 mm, 

types of feet 

F 

G H 

J K 

foot anatomy & fIt > notIons of anatomy > 63 

a. posterior tarsus 

1. Calcaneus 

2. Talus (Astragalus) 

3. Trochlear surface 

B. anterior tarsus 

4. Navicular bone (Tarsal 

Scaphoid) 

5. Cuboid bone 

6. 3 cuneiform bones 

c. Metatarsus 

7. 5 metatarsal bones 

d. toes 

8. 14 phalanges 

- the axis between the talus (astragalus) 

and calcaneus becomes 

off-centered which increases the 

surface area at the base of the foot. 

Therefore, to be accurate, feet should 

be measured when the person is 

standing with his/her weight distributed 

on both feet and knees slightly 

flexed. 

Pronated Normal Supinated 

flat foot foot high-arched foot 

Normal knees. Varus knees. Valgus knees. 

Some people naturally have varus or 

valgus knees. The boot cuff follows 

the profile of the leg. Therefore, the 

boot sole forms an angle with the 

ground (i.e.: the ski is not flat). 

The ski boots can be adapted to the 

shape of the leg by canting the cuff. 

The canting adjustment by canting 

the cuff allows the boot to follow 

the morphology of the leg to keep 

skis flat 

A deeper analysis of the customer’s feet (fig. F) is necessary to observe 

the possible deformations that can become problem areas. Salomon has 

parts (page 70) at your disposal that will help you to easily adapt the 

boots to these deformations. 

high arches: 

The skier needs an arch support 

that can relieve pressure on ‘overloaded’ 

areas. 

Arch supports can be attached to 

the footboards. (fig. G) 

Supinated or pronated feet: 

This is the deviation of the foot’s 

vertical axis towards the medial or 

lateral side, which can lead to problems 

in the areas of the anklebones, 

navicular bone or talus. 

To adapt to this deviation of the 

foot, it is possible to place wedges 

directly on the footboard. 

However, this wedge should only be 

used if the lateral articulation under 

the ankle bone is mobile. (fig. H) 

high instep: 

You can grind the footboard (Falcon 

and X Wave) to increase the volume. 

This sole is realized in grindable 

PU foam. To increase the 

volume of the boot or to change the 

position of the foot. 

Caution, grind on the top surface 

only. Grinding the base will effect 

the interface with the Chassis. A 

depth gauge is marked front and 

back for even grinding. (fig. J) 

low instep: 

The height and inclination of the 

footboard can be modified by 

adding: 

- heel lifts (fig. K)

Boot 

foot anatoMy and fit > Recommendations (continued) 

recommendations & performance accessories 

The modifications that can be made 

on the Salomon boots should be 

considered as the ‘final touch’ of 

personalization. 

Before undertaking this type of 

operation, it is important to observe 

certain basic rules: 

- Always proceed step by step, 

starting with temporary measures 

before going on to permanent 

changes. 

- If you decide to proceed with the 

permanent modifications as a 

last resort, they are entirely your 

responsibility. 

problems, causes & Solutions chart 

problems causes Solutions 

firSt MetatarSal preSSure 

(medial side of the forefoot) 

fifth MetatarSal preSSure 

(lateral side of the forefoot) 

anKleBone preSSure 

pain/pressure behind one or 

both ankle bones. 

foot anatomy & fIt > recommendatIons > 64 

Shell too narrow. 

Prominent first 

metatarsal. 

Shell (or liner) too 

narrow. Prominent 

fifth metatarsal. 

Prominent medial and 

lateral ankle bones. 

Heel shape. 

They require the proper tools and 

should be undertaken only for big 

problems and by experienced specialists. 

For example: 

- Stretching the shell. 

- Grinding the liner (not recommended 

for manufactured liners). 

- Grinding the shell. 

Solutions all products: 

› Stick adhesive foam around the first metatarsal on the medial side 

of the liner. 

› Stretch the shell locally with a heat gun* and other tools designed 

for this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry). 

X Wave, ellipse, performa: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit or 

instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is a risk 

of deforming it due to how thin this part is). 


› Remove the insole (increases volume). 

› Stick adhesive foam around the painful area to dissipate the pressure. 

› Stretch the shell locally using a heat gun* and other tools designed for 

this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry). 

X Wave, performa and Verse: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit 

or the instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is 

a risk of deforming it due to how thin this part is). 

* caution: The boots whose lower shells aren’t made of Polyurethane (PU) must not be stretched with heat (there is a risk of damaging the material). 

important: Boots whose lower 

shell material is not made of 

Polyurethane (PU), should not be 

heated (risk of damaging the material). 

Solutions for falcon, X Wave, performa: 

Special precautions are required when stretching the shell: 

› heat* the inside and outside of the cuff and lower shell simultaneously (so that both will be 

at the same temperature despite their different thicknesses and layers), 

› place the stretching device on the inside, close the boot during the 

stretching operation, and proceed with very small successive degrees 

of stretching to avoid creating a space between the cuff and 

the shell. 

falcon and X Wave: 

Be careful not to heat the metal parts (there is a risk of damaging the 

plastic). 

Solutions for rear-entry models: 

› Remove the insole to increase the volume. 

› Stick a C-shaped foam pad in the area around the 

ankle bones (on the liner). 

› Remove some foam from the liner in the area 

around the ankle bones. 

› Add shims to blue heel envelopment plate.

Boot 

foot anatoMy and fit > Recommendations (continued) 

problems, causes & Solutions chart 

problems causes Solutions 

heel preSSure Lack of room in the 

boot. Prominent calcaneus 

(exostosis). 

heel MoVeMent Very narrow heel. 

Achilles tendon axis 

very hollow. 

Thin ankle. 

inSulation and nuMBneSS 

cold, numb feet. 

craMpS 

Muscle pain under the 

arch, in the calf, pressure 

points, irritations. 

Poor blood circulation 

caused by pressure 

on the blood vessels/ 

nerves. 

Poor foothold 

distribution 

(especially with 

children). 

Pronounced arch, 

high instep or flat 

foot. 

Pronated foot. 

Thick lower leg. 

Shin Bite Lack of pressure 

distribution. 

foot anatomy & fIt > recommendatIons > 65 


› Stick a chevron (foam pad in the form of an inverted V) above the 

calcaneus to push the foot forward in the shell and reduce the 

pressure on the heel. 

› It is possible to remove some PU from both sides of the Achilles 

tendon on the cuff (grinding) and/or on the lower shell 

(Falcon, X Wave, Ellipse and Performa). 


› Stick a chevron above the calcaneus on the liner. 

› Stick an L-shaped piece of foam under each ankle bone (for better 

grip). 

› Add a shim to the top of the liner (forward position that pushes 

the foot backward in the boot and increases pressure on the 

heel). 

› Use a thicker insole. 

› Add a shim under the footboard. 

› Add heel lifts. 


› Make sure the adjustments are not too tight. 

› Remove the insoles from the liners. 

› Add a small arch support and varus wedge (or a shim on the inside of the heel under 

the footboard from the performance series). 

› Grind the footboard. 


› Add or remove the arch support. 

› Add an insole or propose a custom insole. 

› Remove all shims under the footboard. 

› Modify the angle of the forward lean to distribute the skier’s weight differently. 

› Grind the footboard. 

› Grinding the Custom Sole: 

To increase the volume of the boot or to change the position 

of the foot. Caution, grind on the top surface only. 

Grinding the base will affect the interface with the 

Chassis. A depth gauge is marked front and 

back for even grinding. 

falcon: 

› Add a shin wedge on the cuff (choose the mounting position according 

to the height of the skier).

helMet & pole 

Technical reference 

for the complete line 

of current Salomon 

helmets and poles 

66

helMet & pole 

helMet technology 

helmet technical information 

Developed with a specialized sport trauma physician 

In order to meet consumer’s 

needs in terms of safety, head 

hold and comfort Salomon uses 

two construction technologies: 

Standard technology and In Mold 

technology. Both provide performance 

in terms of resistance, 

absorption, deflecting impact and 

resisting penetration. 

in Mold technology: an external 

PC layer molded together with 

the EPS cap to provide the best 

ratio lightness / resistance to the 

helmet. 

injected technology: an external 

cap made of ABS combined with 

an internal cap made of EPS. 

fit foams: All our models are 

benefiting from specific Fit foams 

disposed on the anatomical areas 

to increase head comfort. 

Salomon channelled all its experience 

for your protection and pleasure 

but don’t lose your head! 

Our helmets combine our recognized 

professionnalism and pure design to 

create protection for the senses. 

instructions for use and maintenance 

- iMportant: the helmet must always 

be fastened on the head (chin strap 

buckled under the chin). 

- Check the adjustment and the condition 

of your helmet before each use. 

- Always take care of your helmet, 

even when not using it. Store it away 

from any heat source and sunlight 

(since prolonged exposure to the 

sun weakens all plas tic materials, 

it is recommended to replace your 

helmet at least every 3 years). Let it 

dry in a ventilated area. 

- For cleaning the outside surface of the 

skull cap, use soap and water only. 

My perfect fit 

A 

- Do not use any type of gasoline 

products, solvents or any other 

chemical substances. 

- Do not modify the helmet in any way. 

Do not varnish it or add any coloring 

products. 

- After receiving an impact, the helmet 

may be damaged to the point that 

it is no longer adequate to protect 

the wearer’s head against further 

impacts. Even if the damage is not 

visible, it is necessary to replace the 

helmet. 

S 

D 

OSFA 

custom air System (fig. A): 

new adjustable system for a perfect 

fit. 

oSfa (fig. S) With this adjustment 

system the helmet is covering 

several sizes: one helmet for 

sizes 51-55cm and one helmet for 

sizes 55-58cm. 

Beanie convertible (fig. D) 

Women customization 

pimp My helmet 

Our comprehensive winter sport 

helmet range meets applicable helmet 

standards and uses the unique 

Advanced Fit Technology design for 

your comfort and performance. 

Be smart and protect your head 

in style. 

Standards 

examples of the main tests of norms: 

helmets don’t offer 

absolute protection, so 

ride within your limits 

and take care. 

roll off dynamic fastening 

impact test test device test 

covered areas Visibility 

measurement measurement 

all Salomon helmets respect the following standards : 

ce - en 1077 

(helmets for alpine skiers*) - 

tÜV certified. 

Sound System 

Warning: for use with Salomon 

snowsports helmets only. 

Headphones used in snowsports 

may cause the skier/rider to not 

hear other skiers/riders. This can 

lead to an accident and possible 

injury or death. Always stay in 

control. Skiers/Riders downhill 

from you always have priority, so 

it's your priority to make sure you 

avoid them. Headphones will also 

restrict your ability to hear what 

your edge/edges are doing on the 

snow and may distract you. They 

helmet > 67 

! 

aStM f2040 (helmets for recreational* 

snow sports). 

* Non motorized winter sports 

may distract you from focusing on 

skiing or riding safely which may 

lead to less control. 

care and handling: 

The earpad sound system is built 

to handle cold, snowy conditions. 

However, this system is not waterproof. 

Do not submerge the 

Earpad or cord in water or any 

other liquid. Do not attempt to 

clean or to disinfect your helmet 

with the earpad sound system 

installed.

helMet & pole 

helMet technology > (continued) 

choosing the right size for your helmet 

YOUR SIZE Head perimeter (cm) 

adult WoMen 

Divine Origins Custom Air, 

Divine Custom Air, Icon Origins Custom Air, 

Poison Custom Air, Poison, Venom, 

Venom Audio CA Elyse Saugstad 

adult Men 

Equipe*, Valdez*, X-Wing Custom Air, 

Ranger Custom Air BT, Impact Custom Air, 

Ranger Custom Air, Patrol Custom Air, Patrol, 

Brigade Audio, Brigade Ghost Custom Air, 

Brigade Pro Model, Patrol CA Mike Douglas, 

Brigade Audio CA Cody Townsend 

* Size NOT available for Equipe, Valdez helmets 

adult WoMen oSfa SySteM: 

Icon Origins, Pearl Origins, Divine Origins 

adult Men oSfa SySteM: 

Ranger, Cruiser 

Junior 

*Equipe JR, Jib, Kiana, Patrol Junior 

OSFA System 

Zoom, Zoom Combo 

* Size ONLY available for Equipe JR (White Red) 

head Measurer use & Maintenance 

H J K L 

Warning: 

Salomon has developed a head 

mea sur er that will help you to better 

serve your customer by being 

able to recommend the helmet size 

that corresponds to the circumference 

of his/her head. 

This measurer can be used for all 

Salomon Alpine and In Line Skate 

helmets. 

Please remember that the size 

given by the measurer (centimeters) 

should be used only as an 

indication to help you orient your 

customer toward the proper size. 

The final selection of the appropriate 

size should be left to the customer. 

Using the measurer should never 

replace trying on the helmet. 

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 

JR (51-52) 

XXS (53-54) S (55-56) M (57-58) 

XXS (51-55) 

XS (54-55) 

S/M (55-58) 

XXS (53-54) S (55-56) M (57-58) 

The helmet is a safety product: it 

must be chosen in the size that is 

suitable to its user and be properly 

positioned on his/her head (the 

chin strap adjusted in the closed 

position) to ensure optimum protection, 

comfort and hold. 

recommendations for use: 

- Loosen the roller (a) to be able 

to place the measurer easily on 

the head. 

- Position the measurer on the 

head according to (fig. H), 

touching the brow (B) and the 

occipital bone (c). 

Important: Make sure the headband 

(d) does not compress 

the ears, which would affect the 

measurement. 

XS* (54-55) M (57-58) XL (60-61) 

S (55-56) 

L (58-59) 

XXS/S (53-56) M (57-59) 

XS/S (54-56) 

L (58-59) 

XXL (61-62) 

M (57-59) L (60-62) 

L/XXL (59-62) 

- Hold the measurer in this position 

and turn the roller (a) (rotate 

it clockwise). 

- Turn the roller until it disengages 

(fig. J). 

- Carefully remove the measurer 

from the head, pulling the rear 

upward, while maintaining pressure 

on the nose (fig. K). 

- Read the measurement on the 

graduated scale (e) in the window 

(fig. L). 

- Choose the helmet according to 

the size given by the measurer. 

- Try the helmet on. Switch sizes if 

there is a problem with the fit. 

Salomon has provided for stickers 

that can be put on the head measurer 

for a better understanding of 

how to use the roller. 

helmet > 68 

choosing your size (see table): 

The helmet is a safety product. 

To ensure optimal protection, 

comfort and head hold, the helmet 

must be chosen in the correct size. 

To choose the correct size, it is 

nec es sary to measure the cranial 

perime ter of the head in cm (from 

the fore head to the most prominent 

back part of the head). 

helmet adjustment: 

The helmet must be properdine 

positioned on, and adjusted to the 

user’s head to ensure maximum 

comfort and protection. 

A properly positioned helmet must 

not be too far forward or backwards 

on the user’s head ; the chin 

strap must always be properly 

adjusted and in the closed position. 

In case of children’s helmets, an 

adult should always check that the 

helmet is properly secured. 

Maintenance recommendations: 

To clean the measurer, you can use 

a cloth with soap and water. 

It is prohibited to use chemical 

products, hot water or pressurized 

water, gasoline, alcohol, 

detergents, solvents or aerosols 

that could permanently damage 

the plastic materials and erase the 

markings. 

Warning: 

Salomon does not cover any damage 

to the head measurer that is a 

result of transportation, storage or 

not abiding by the instructions for 

use or maintenance.

helMet & pole 

pole technonolgy 

pole technical information 

choosing a pole size 

- Turn the pole upside down with the tip pointing up, 

- Hold the pole right under the basket, 

- Your arm will form a right angle (90°) when you have 

the ideal size. 

Mounting the replaceable baskets > procedure 

Salomon has made 3 types of replaceable baskets available to you: 

1 2 

a) Mounting: at the same time, 

screw the basket on and push it 

towards the handle of the pole. 

fig. A. Removing: at the same 

time, unscrew the basket and 

pull it toward the tip of the pole. 

B) Screw the basket on completely 

until you hear four clicks (wear 

gloves as a precaution). fig. S 

pole Shaft Materials > technical features 

aluminium range 

- Salomon know-how in aluminium 

is proven with bindings, ILS 

and Mavic wheels. 

- According to this experience, we 

defined three levels of strength: 

aluminium technology 

by Salomon 

HHHH 

al 

40% stronger 

al HHH 

15% stronger 

al HH 

Competitive strength/price ratio 

Maintenance recommendations 

Use a cloth with soap and water to clean the poles. It is prohibited to use 

chemicals, hot water or pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents, 

solvents or aerosols that can permanently damage the plastic materials 

and erase the cosmetics. 

Benefits of main technical features 

- Spaceframe shaft: specific 3D 

shapes (wing and AHT) for 

advanced performance: higher 

resistance and stiffness. 

- Bi-material grip: 

› hard part for precision, 

› soft part for comfort. 

- Racing grip: specifically designed 

for racers, a closer grip 

to the pole for higher precision. 

- Ultra light foam grip: the best 

grip if you need lightness and 

comfort with or without gloves. 

rental poles 

- Gripfit: the grip with the best fit 

and right shapes for less efforts. 

- NPS (No Problem Strap): dual 

side strap, easy to use and with 

improved comfort. 

- Interchangeable baskets: the big 

one fits off-pists and powder, the 

small one is more adapted for all 

other uses. 

- Carbide tip: bi-material tip for 

higher resistance and durability. 

- Salomon designed specific poles for rental adapted to a professional 

and intense use. 

- This warranty will not apply for damages resulting of rental use of poles 

that was not designed specifically for rental. 

composite range 

- We do our pole’s shafts the 

same way that golf companies 

do their own golf shafts. 

- We defined three levels of 

Carbon grade: 

carbon technology 

by Salomon 

HHHH 

c 

80% of Carbon 

c HHH 

40% of Carbon 

c HH 

15% of Carbon 

Pole > 69

Spare partS 

Spare partS – contentS 

contents > 70 

alpine Binding 71 

SKiS 76 

poleS 76 

alpine BootS 76 

nordic 79 

SnoWBoard BoardS 81 

SnoWBoard BindingS 81 

SnoWBoard BootS 83 

footWear 84 

This catalogue is for product display only. Salomon reserves the right to modify or discontinue any product. Every product not available in all countries. SALOMON reserves 

the right to limit or to modify color and/or aesthetic versions of spare parts. These spare parts will nonetheless continue to be distributed in their original functions. 

All rights reserved. Any reproductions, partial or in full, are prohibited. 

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

Spare partS 

alpine Binding 

alPIne BIndIngs > 71 

1X2 

track 

Smartrak Prolink + 914 

Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI 

04-05 S912 TI SC • S810TI SC • S712 SC • S710 TI SC • S710 SC • C609 SC • C608 SC • 

78829401 

78829601 

$ 20.00 

$ 20.00 

1X2 C607 SC • C509 SC • 06 Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 

SC • 09 711 SC • L9 SC • L7 SC • L10 SC 

78378501 $ 9.00 

1X2 

04-05 S305 SC • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC 

• 09 T5 SC 

78378701 $ 9.00 

adjustable toe Base plate 

S900 Eq SC 99 • SC 04+: All products • 

1X2 

IFT Free & fast 04+: All SC products 

001178 

1X2 HI 09+: All products starting with 09/10 range 10833301 

1X2 Z Speed all models: Lever adjustment 12027001 

Quadrax toe track 

S700 • S700 SR • S700 T • S700 TSR • S710 • S708 TSR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti 

1X2 

• S711 Pa 

Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 SR • 608 • Smartrak Grip + Z12 

• Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 • 609 TI • WARNING CHANGE THE SCREW FOR: 

1X2 Z10 TI AXE + (788314) • 610 CP (000930) • 609 D+ (001101) • 607 (000896) • 607 SR (000896) 

Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC 

• Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711 

78379001 

78829701 

78829801 

1X2 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • 08 LZ 7 • 09 T5 • T5 SR • L7 • L7 SR • L9 • L9 SR 54833901 

1X2 08 LZ 8 • LZ 9 10061901 

position indicator 

1X2 ITF Free & Fast SC 04+: All products 78385801 

central plate 

1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 78576301 

1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 78829901 

1X2 

Smartrak Prolink/Control + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 711 78833601 

Smartrak Prolink/Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI 78833801 

Smartrak Grip + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 611 • 610 • 609 78833901 

Smartrak Grip + 609 TI • 710 TI • Z10 TI 78834001 

Smartrak Rental 10056601 

Lightrak senior HL 10832901 

Lightrak senior JL 10833001 

heel guide or heel track housing 

1X2 C&S: All products 99- Except: Junior 001173 

1X2 04-05 S710 SR • C609 SR • C509 SR • 06 609 SR 268-348 mm: 78379501 

1X2 04-05 C305 SR • 06 305 • 06 TZ5SR 190-246 mm: 78379201 

1X2 SC Senior: All products 260-382 mm: 12030101 

1X2 04-05 C305 CS • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC 216-304 mm: 78379301 

track 

1X2 Z Speed: Brake plate 12027101 

1X2 Flat Ti: All products 78389701 

1X2 Smartrak Ti: All products 24729201 

1X2 

Parts Count 

lever 

All C&S products • Kaikki C&S • Tuotteet • 99+ Except: Junior • Cosmic • Racing • 900 • 

850 • 700 • 725 • 600 • 509 • 400 

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.) 

how to read the tables 

04: year 230-308 mm: dimensions (T175): size ##### while quantites last ##### New 

78393901 

Reference 

$ 10.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 4.75 

$ 4.75 

$ 4.75 

$ 4.75 

$ 4.75 

$ 4.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 3.50 

$ 13.00 

$ 28.00 

$ 8.00

Spare partS 

V.i. Window 


1X2 C305 • S305 • S 305 SC • C 305 SR (0,75-4,5) 78146601 

anti friction plate 

1X2 914 FIS 20 • 914 78830001 

1X2 Z12 TI • Z12 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 • 710 TI • 710 SC • 710 • 710 ITF 78830101 

1X2 

611 • 610 • 610 SC • 610 CP • 609 • 609 Ti/D+ • 609 SC • 608 • 608 SC 78830201 

607 • 607 SR 78830301 

1X2 914 LAB 78830401 

1X2 

All S914 models (except S914 T Fis 17) • S912 • S910 • S875 • S850 • S812 • 811 • S810 

• S900 Eq Poweraxe • S900 Eq AL Poweraxe S900 Eq Axe plus 99 • S900 TI • S900 Eq FIS 

• S900 Carbon 99 • S900 Eq AL 99 • S900 Eq SC 99 • S711 Ps • S711 • S711 Pi Sp • S710 

Pi Sp SR 

887608 

1X2 00-05 All C products • Except: C607 • C607 SR 888134 

1X2 

Quadrax 600 (except Q600 Equalizer) • Q675 • Q700 Synchro C • Q400 • Q300 • Q300 SR • 

Q300 Synchro C • Q300 mini • Q500 • Q600 • Q600 Drive Plus 99 • Q600 Poweraxe • Q500 SR 

• Q500 Drive Plus 99 • Q400 SR • Q500 Synchro C (Drive +) • Q725 Drive + • Q725 Poweraxe • 

Q575 • C509 sr • C509 • C407 SR • C407 • C305 Grom SR • C305 Grom • Mini Grom • C610 

000934 

1X2 S300 • S300 SC • S305 • S305 SC 05- 001134 

1X2 Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 S 54834001 

1X2 Junior Performance AFD (Junior boots norms only) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 SC 89267001 

1X2 

Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 08 Junior TZ 5 • LZ 7 • LZ 8 • LZ 9 

09 Junior T 5 • L 7 • L 8 • L 9 

10056701 

1X2 07 STH 12 • 08 STH 14 54834101 

1X2 07 STH 16 54834201 

1X2 08 STH 14 Driver 10447501 

1X2 Z Speed all models 12027301 

$ 5.00 

$ 7.50 

$ 7.50 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.75 

$ 13.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

toe housing 

Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • Z10 TI AXE + • 710 • 610 CP • 610 • 609 D+ • 609 • 609 

SR • 608 • 607 • 607 SR • Smartrak Grip + Z12 • Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 • 

78856001 $ 10.00 

1X2 

609 TI • Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710 

SC: Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711 • STH 12 78856101 $ 8.00 

Z 14 • STH 14 • Z 12 oversize • STH 12 oversize 10833201 $ 10.00 

Brake 

1X2 Junior SC: Q300 SC • S300 SC • S305 SC • 305 SC 06 887610 

1X2 

Junior SR: Q300 • Q300 SR • S300 • S305 • C305 SR • 305 SR 03-07 • 305 06 887611 

Junior mini: Q300 Mini • MiniGrom • 305 mini 06 887609 

1X2 Junior: TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR 07 54834301 

1X2 Junior: TZ 5 SC • TZ 5 Juniortrak 07 10055301 

1X2 

S920 LAB • S916 LAB • S914 LAB • 

920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • 

914 ZZ LAB • STH 16 • STH 14 Driver 

• STH 14 • STH 12 Oversize • STH 12 • 

Z14 LAB • Z12 LAB • Z Speed (all models) 

1X2 Other range models 


L 

l 

DG = Double Grip 

R75 DG X 100: 78575401 

R80 DG X 100: 78575501 

R90 DG X 100: 78575701 R100 DG X 100: 78575801 

R115 DG X 100: 78575901 

R130 DG X 100: 78855701 

B75 DG X 100: 78574501 

B80 DG X 100: 78574801 

B85 DG X 100: 78574901 

B90 DG X 100: 78575001 

B100 DG X 100: 78575101 

B115 DG X 100: 78575201 

B130 DG X 100: 78830601 

C609 SC on Snowblade B85 G X 100: 78855801 

G = Grip 

B 85 G x 100 

R 100 DG x 100 

l L 

$ 6.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 15.00

Spare partS 

1X1 


Jigs 

All Senior products 

56-99 mm: 001156 

80-123 mm: 001157 

$ 100.00 

$ 100.00 

Q300 • Q300mini • S300 • S305 • C305 • Mini Grom 56-99 mm: 78406101 $ 80.00 

TZ 5 Juniortrak 56-99 mm: 24729001 $ 100.00 

Synchro Center+Rental: Junior/Senior 

56-99 mm: 001003 

80-123 mm: 001040 

$ 100.00 

$ 100.00 

Z Speed: All models 70-116 mm: 11139301 $ 50.00 

tools 

1X1 Deflex/Hangl & Poweraxe Race GS: Drill bit Ø 4,6 X L 11,5 mm: 001121 

1X5 Drill bit 

Ø 3,6 X L 8 mm : 000814 

Ø 4,1 X L 8 mm: 000813 

Ø 4,1 X L 9,5 mm: 000893 

Ø 3,6 X L 9,5 mm: 000892 

1X1 Pilot: Torx bit for electric screwdriver Fein 25 mm: 887607 

1X1 Posidrive screwdriver 7 mm: 000862 

1X1 Adjustement tool 000902 

1X2 Pilot & Poweraxe Race GS / Hangl 00: Torx bit 25 mm: 887606 

1X100 Repair plugs 000846 

1X1 Special binding mounting glue 000811 

1X100 Plastic plugs 

Ø 4,5 mm: (white) 000819 

(black) 000818 

1X1 Tube of grease 000905 

1X2 Transparent demoboard + straps 001188 

plate Kit 

1X2 Cosmic & Z Axe plus 15 mm: 78491501 

1X2 Snowblade release 78497501 


$ 40.00 

$ 78.00 

$ 78.00 

$ 78.00 

$ 78.00 

$ 16.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 20.00 

$ 16.00 

$ 16.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 3.50 

$ 5.00 

$ 20.00 

$ 20.00 

$ 34.00

Spare partS 

Référence 

Reference 

000834 

000836 

000899 

000900 

000908 

000957 

001004 

001018 

001085 

001087 

001099 

000829 10 x 13,5 

000830 10 x 15,0 

000832 10 x 23,0 

000894 10 x 11,8 

000895 8 x 13,0 

000896 9 x 15,0 

000897 10 x 18,8 

000909 9 x 10,0 

000910 10 x 16,5 

000911 9 x 18,0 

000912 9 x 29,0 

000930 9 x 16,5 

000958 9 x 12,5 

000960 9 x 27,0 

000961 9 x 8,5 

001057 9 x 19,5 

001058 9 x 32,5 

001082 9 x 21,0 

001083 9 x 25,5 

001086 10 x 19,5 

001100 9 x 24,0 

001101 

001102 

9 x 23,0 

001136 9 x 10,7 

001138 9 x 34,0 

78385901 8,8 x 14,35 

78831301 9 x 17,3 

78831401 9 x 26 

78832201 BN8 4 x 10 

78832801 8,8 x 12,7 

88813801 10 x 12 

88813901 10 x 20,5 

10115201 8,8 x 12,6 

L 

ø 

mm : Ø x L mm : Ø x L 

L 

Longueur • Length 

ø 

10 x 13,5 

10 x 20,5 

10 x 16,5 

10 x 23,2 

10 x 25,0 

10 x 27,5 

10 x 18,3 

10 x 21,3 

10 x 36,0 

10 x 29,0 

10 x 32,5 

10 x 34,0 

Screws (Together column number and reference # = screw positions) 

Voir tableaux pages suivantes pour les modèles correspondants 

See charts on following pages for the concerned models 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

001153 79491501 

001101 

000912 

001102 

001057 

001083 

78831501 

78831701 

78832001 

(All prices in U.S. dollars. 78832501 Prices are subject to change at anytime.) 

} 

787169 - 787170 

SMARTRAK CONTROL + 

Z12TI . Z10 


e.g.: 17/ 000900 

78497501 SMARTRAK JUNIOR 

$ 13.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 15.00 

— 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 9.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 13.00 

$ 10.00

Spare partS 


toe (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref. 

C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 mini 06 • Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07 • L 7 • L 7 SR 08 2/ 000894 

S305 Grom 2/ 000958 

S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S914 Fis • S912 Ti • S912 Fi • S912 • S910 Team • S810 • S810Ti • S914 Pi FR • S914 Fis 24 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 24 • 

S910 Fis 20 • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S812 Pi Edge • S910 Ti 

2/ 001057 

C610 • C509 • C509 SR • C608 SR • C608 • C608 Fis 20 • C608 Fis 17 • C710 • C609 Ti • C609 SR • C609 • 3/ 000930 

S710 • S708 T • S708 T SR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti • S710 Pi FR 2/ 000911 

S711 • S711 Pi FR 4/ 001082 

Plaque Axe + 99+ S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S910 T • S810 Ti • S810 CP • S912 Ti • S810 SR 3/ 000912 

S710 Axe+ • S708T • S710 CP • S710 Ti CP • S711 CP 1/ 000960 

C610 Axe+ • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • C710 Ti CP 4/ 001083 

Plaque Drive+ 500 • 600 • C509 Drive+ • C609 Drive+ 4/ 001101 

S305 SC 8/ 000961 6/ 000958 

Junior T 5 SC 07 8/ 000961 9/ 000958 3/ 000894 

S912 Ti SC • 810 SC • S 810 Ti SC 3/ 000911 5/ 000909 

S710 SC • S711 SC • S712 SC • S710 Ti SC 6/ 000930 5/ 000909 6/ 001057 

C509 SC • C608 SC • C609 SC 6/ 000930 6/ 000911 5/ 000909 

LZ 8 SC 08 • L 7 &• L 9 SC 09 5/ 000909 12/ 000958 9/ 000829 

920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 16/ 001101 16/ 001082 

Pilot S710 Cosmic 4/ 001082 

S920 • S916 • S914 Fis 17 • S920 Race • STH 16 07 4/ 000910 4/ 000911 

LZ 8 • LZ 9 08 • L 9 & L 10 09 7/ 000829 

C607 SR • C607 4/ 78385901 

S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3 3/ 001101 

Z12 Ti SC • Z12 SC • Z10 Ti SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06 5/ 000909 6/ 000930 6/ 001057 

Z12 Ti • Z10 Ti • Z10 Fis 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 Ti • 609 SR 608 06 • 

Smartrak Grip+ 610, 611, 710 Ti, Z10 Ti, Z10, Z12, 609, 609 Ti 06 • Z14 08 

6/ 000930 6/ 78831301 

Z12 Ti AXE+ • 610 CP 06 2/ 000960 2/ 78831401 

609 D+ 06 1/ 001100 1/ 001101 

914 Fis 20 • 914 • Smartrak Grip + 914 06 1/ 000930 1/ 78831301 

Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08 1/ 78832201 

Smartrak Prolink + 914 06 1/ 78832801 

Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08 2/ 10115201 

STH 12 07 • STH 14 • Z14 LAB 08 6/ 000930 6/ 000911 

STH 14 Driver 08 3/ 000911 

Brake (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref. 

Brake 5/ 000829 

heel (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref. 

Pilot Edge Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Ti Pi Edge 17/ 000830 17/ 000829 17/ 000900 

Pilot Free Ride Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S711 Pi FR 17/ 001086 5/ 000957 

C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 Mini 06 2/ 000834 2/ 000899 

S305 Grom 8/ 001004 11/ 001018 

S914 Fis 17 • 914 • Z12 TI • Z10 TI • Z10 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 608 06 • C608 Fis 17 • S710 • S608 • C610 • C509 • C608 • C710 • S710 Ti • 

C609 Ti • C609 • Z14 & Z12 08 • LZ 8 08 • LZ 9 08 • Z12++ 09 • L 9 & L 10 09 

11/ 000894 11/ 001004 

609 SR 06 • S710 SR • S711 SR • S708 T SR • C509 SR • C608 SR • C609 SR 1/ 000894 1/ 000836 

S912 Ti • S912 • S810 • S711 • S910 T • S810 TI • S914 Fis 24 • S910 Fis 24 3/ 000897 6/ 000957 

C608 Fis 20 • 914 Fis • S914 Pi FR • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • 914 FIS 20 • Z10 FIS 20 06 • 

S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S812 Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 20 

11/ 000830 11/ 000900 

Plaque Axe + 99+ S850 • S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S710 • S711 CP • S912 Ti • Z10 TI AXE+ • 610 CP 06 • 

S608 T • C610 • S910 T • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • S710 CP • S810 CP • C710 Ti CP 

11/ 001101 11/ 001102 

Plaque Drive + • C509 Drive + • 609 D + 06 11/ 000911 11/ 000908 

S305 SC • 305 SC 06 6/ 000957 11/ 001099 

S850 SC (Drive+) • C608 SC • C609 SC • S912 Ti SC • S810 SC • S810 S • S712 S • S711 SC • S710 S • C509 SC • S810 Ti SC • All SC 02+ 9/ 001083 9/ 001102 

920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 16/ 001100 16/ 001138 16/ 000897 

S920 • S916 • STH 12 & 16 07 • STH Driver 14 08 • STH 14 08 • Z14 LAB 08 • STH12++ 09 4/ 000897 4/ 000829 4/ 000912 

C607 SC 17/ 001100 17/ 001102 

C607 SR • 607 SR 06 • L7 SR 08 17/ 000909 17/ 001004 

C607 • 607 06 • L7 08 2/ 000899 2/ 000909 

S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3 7/ 888139 7/ 001087 

Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06 • LZ8 SC 08 • L 9 & L 10 09 1/ 001085 2/ 001083 

Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914 • Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 TI • Z10 • 711 • 710 TI 06 • Z14 08 1/ 78832201 

Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07 11/ 000896 2/ 000899 

Junior T 5 Juniortrak 07 11/ 000908 11/ 001101 

Junior T 5 SC 07 11/ 001099 11/ 000912

Spare partS 

SKiS 

poleS 

tips 

alPIne skIs > 76 

1X2 Verse 8500 00-03 • Verse 590 03 • X-Scream 700 01-02 • Crossmax 700 01-04 • Scleaver 790 03 • Scrambler 400 04 89249201 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

Crossmax 10 Pilot Rental 01-02 • Crossmax 8 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax 7 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Scleaver 7.9 

Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 10 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax7 TX Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 8 Pilot Rental 02 • Scream 10 

Pilot Rental 01-02 

Equipe SC • Equipe GC • Equipe 9GC • Demo 10 3V • Demo 10 2V • Demo9 • Demo8 • •Demo Lady • Crossmax V12 

• Crossmax V10 • Rush n°10 • Rush n°7 • Rush 700 • •Streetracer 10 • Streetrace r8 • Streetracer 7 • Streetracer 6, 

600, 800 05-06 • •Rush 6, 600, 800 05-06 • Equipe 10 T 3V 05-06 • Demo Lady 06 

Scrambler Hot • Scrambler 9 • Scrambler 8 • Scrambler 7 • Scrambler 6 • Scrambler 5 • Scrambler Custom • 

Scrambler 700 • Scrambler 400 • Siam n°10 • Siam n°7 • XW 5, 6, 8 • 400, 700 06 • XW Fury • Hurricane 06 • 

Siam n°5, 400 05-06 • Axess 06 

Crossmax 10 Pilot 03-04 • Crossmax 9 Pilot 04 • Crossmax 8 Pilot 04 • Teneighty 02-04 • Scream 10 Hot 03-04 • 

Scream 10 Xtra Hot 03-04 

Equipe GC • GC Race • GC Series • SC, SC Race, 3V • Streetracer 8, 10, 800, 80,8 TX, Sport • Demo X 2V, X 3V, XR, XT • 

Crossmax V8, V10, V12, V800 • 9000 replica 06 Equipe 3V, GC Series, GC Race, SC Race • Aero GT, X • Demo X3, XR, XT, 

GTX • Crossmax V8, V10, V800, W12 • XW Cyclone, Typhoon 07 Equipe GC, GC Series, SC Race, RC • Aero GT R, GT, XSI 

• Aeromax Ti, STi • Demo XR, XT • Crossmax V10 • Origins Amethyst, Amethyst 800 08 

XW 3, 4,4 Tx, 10 • Siam N3, N4, N8, N10, N 40, Flirt, Origins, Sinsation • XW Blast, Tornado, Sandstorm, Vector, AT, 

X Radiant 06 XW 4, 6, 800, X3, X7, Attack, Tx, STX, Vector, Tornado, Fury, Sandstorm, Storm • Jewel Amber, Crystal, 

Diadem, Opal, Origins, Pearl, Topaz - Demo lady 07 XW 4, 6, 8, 10, 500, 800, X7, X9, Fire, Cyclone, Hurricane • 

Origins Amber, Amber 500, Pearl, Ruby, Diadem, Crystal, Jade, Opal,Topaz • Demo lady 08 

Equipe 2V Race 07 • Demo X2, Ti, RT 07 • X Wing 500 07-08 • Aero Ti, S, RT, GTI, Ti Rental, S Rental 07 • 

Jewel Amber 500 07 • Instinct Fever 500 07 • Aeromax RT, SR, GTS 08 

89249301 

78570801 

78571001 

78325101 

78799401 

78799501 

24729101 

1X2 XW Fury 08 • XW Tornado, Tornado Ti 08-09 • Origin Diamond 09-10 • Enduro 10 10077101 

1X2 

XW Storm 09 • XW 8, 6, 4 09 • 8R, 6R 09 • Origin Opal, Topaz, Crystal, Amber, Diadem, Crystal R 5 09 • 

XW Typhoon, Hurricane, Twister 09 

10832701 

1X2 Czar, Lord, Dumont, Suspect, Threat, Lady, Mai Tai 08-10 • Shogun, Vamp, Geisha 09-10 • Knight 10 10879901 

1X2 XW Focus 10 12145601 

1X2 Select, Vital, Zen, Fresh Touch 10 • Powerline Daytona, 24 Speed, 24 Sport, 24 Sport R, GT Pro, GT Pro R 10 12145701 

edges (25cm) 

alpine BootS 

1X2 For all models S90190 

Base Material (50cm) 

1X1 For all models S90158 

1X2 

Baskets 

Carbon Poles: Rental Composite 06-10 • Element 08-10 • Element Vario 10 • Origins 08 

Aluminium poles: Origins 09-10 

08-10: Rental Anodized Adult, Artic, Artic Origins, Northpole, Divine Origins 

10853701 

1X2 09-10: Racer, Northpole Origins, F-One, Allium, X-Wing, Fury, Patrol, Brigade 

10: X-W, Mai Tai, Topaz 

10853901 

1X2 

09-10: Rental Anodized JR, Equipe Junior, X-Wing Junior 

10: Kitten 

10854001 

1X2 Strap Rental Adult 10854201 

Buckle tooth insert 

1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3 (collier/cuff) Collier / Cuff: 10809301 

1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3 Coque / Shell: 10817901 

1X2 

1/4 turn buckle: Performa & Irony • Xwave & Rush • Impact 880 & Idol 880 • Mission 

& Divine• Mission RS & Divine RS 

Collier / Cuff: 12006901 

1X2 Performa & Irony • Elios & Charm • Mission & Divine 99493501 

1X2 Focus • Quest • SPK • Ghost • Shogun • Poison Collier / Cuff: 12007001 


$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 12.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 3.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 2.00

Spare partS 

Buckle (M* = Micro • V* = Vario) 


Poles > 77 

M* 

1X2 

Alu: Ghost • Shogun • Poison • Pro Model • Kaos • Kreation • Kaïd • Keira • SPK S: 10818001 L: 10818101 $ 20.00 

M* 

1X2 

Alu: Course X3 • Falcon • Instinct • Impact • Idol • X Wave • Rush • Mission RS • 

Divine RS • Mission • Divine 

S: 10818201 M: 10818301 L: 10818401 $ 15.00 

M* 

1X2 

Alu: Quest 

S: 12007101 M: 12007201 

L: 12007301 

$ 7.50 

$ 8.00 

M* 

1X2 

Plastic: Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS • Charm • Performa S: 12007401 M: 12007501 L: 12007601 $ 3.00 

V* 

1X1 

Symbio: 500 • 440 S: 78396901 L: 78397001 $ 7.00 

Cable length: 540 mm / 22.0-25.5: 882844 $ 12.00 

V* Symbio 

Cable length: 560 mm / 26.0-30.0: 882845 $ 12.00 

Cable length: 580 mm / 78862701 $ 13.00 

S: 12007701 $ 3.00 

1X2 Plastic: T3 • T2 • X3 60 • Team 

L: 12007801 $ 3.00 

1X2 Quest Backbone 12009601 

1X2 

innerboot 

My Custom Fit Race: 

Falcon • Instinct • X3 JR 

1X2 Rental AutoCustom Shell: Focus • SPK 

1X2 Rental Thermic Fit Biovent: Quest 

1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Performa (M&W) 

1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Symbio 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

1X2 

Thermic Fit: 

Performa T 3 • T 3 Rental • Kaïd • Keira 

Thermic Fit: 

Performa T 2 • T 2 Rental • Kaïd 

Thermic Fit: 

Impact JR 

My Custom Fit Pro: 

Falcon 100 • X3 JR 09 

My Custom Fit Performance: 

Impact Idol 

Rental Thermic Fit: 

Impact Idol 

XFit Fusion Advanced: 

Mission Divine 

XFit Fusion Advanced: 

Mission Divine 

Rental Thermic Fit: 

Mission RS & Divine RS 

23.5: 12001622 24.5: 12001624 25.5: 12001626 

26.5: 12001629 27.5: 12001631 28.5: 12001633 

$ 4.50 

$ 85.00 

22.5W: 12001756 23.5W: 12001722 24.5W: 12001724 25.5W: 12001726 $ 50.00 

26.5: 12001729 27.5: 12001731 28.5: 12001733 

29.5: 12001736 30.5: 12001738 31.5: 12001741 

$ 50.00 

24.5W: 12001824 25.5W: 12001826 26.5W: 12001829 $ 50.00 

27.5: 12001831 28.5: 12001833 29.5: 12001836 

$ 50.00 

22.0W: 78400219 23.5W: 78400222 

24.5W: 78400224 25.5W: 78400226 

$ 72.00 

26.5: 78399929 27.5: 78399931 28.5: 78399933 

29.5: 78399936 30.5: 78399938 

$ 72.00 

31.5: 78583741 32.5: 78583743 33.5: 78583745 $ 78.00 

22.0: 489681 23.5: 489683 24.5: 489685 

25.5: 489687 26.5: 489689 27.5: 489691 

28.5: 489693 29.5: 490429 30.5: 489695 

22.0: 12001919 23.5: 12001922 24.5: 12001924 

25.5: 12001926 26.5: 12001929 

18.0: 12002010 19.0: 12002012 

20.0: 12002054 21.0: 12002055 

22.0: 78399719 23.5: 78399722 24.5: 78399724 

25.5: 78399726 26.5: 78399729 27.5: 78399731 

22.0: 78862919 23.5: 78862922 24.5: 78862924 

25.5: 78862926 26.5: 78862929 27.5: 78862931 

$ 50.00 

$ 30.00 

$ 25.00 

$ 62.00 

$ 86.00 

22.0 W: 55472419 23.5 W: 55472422 24.5 W: 55472424 25.5 W: 55472426 $ 90.00 

26.5: 55472429 27.5: 55472431 28.5: 55472433 

29.5: 55472436 30.5: 55472438 31.5: 55472441 

$ 90.00 

22.0 W: 55472519 23.5 W: 55472522 24.5 W: 55472524 25.5 W: 55472526 $ 70.00 

26.5: 55472529 27.5: 55472531 28.5: 55472533 

29.5: 55472536 30.5: 55472538 31.5: 55472541 

$ 70.00 

22.0 W: 55472619 23.5 W: 55472622 24.5 W: 55472624 25.5 W: 55472626 $ 88.00 

26.5: 55472629 27.5: 55472631 28.5: 55472633 

29.5: 55472636 30.5: 55472638 31.5: 55472641 

22.0 W: 11105519 23.5 W: 11105522 24.5 W: 11105524 25.5 W: 11105526 

$ 88.00 

26.5: 11105529 27.5: 11105531 28.5: 11105533 

29.5: 11105536 30.5: 11105538 31.5: 11105541 

$ 60.00 

22.0 W: 10078319 23.5 W: 10078322 24.5 W: 10078324 25.5 W: 10078326 $ 80.00 

26.5: 10078429 27.5: 10078431 28.5: 10078433 29.5: 10078436 

30.5: 10078438 31.5: 10078441 32.5: 10078443 33.5: 10078445 

$ 88.00

Spare partS 

Bootfitting 

alPIne Boots > 78 

1X1 Heating machine U.S. & Canada: Z15620 $ 295.00 

1X1 Measurer 10877101 

$ 80.00 

Bootfitting 

1X2 Rental Insoles 

18.0: 10078610 19.0: 10078612 20.0: 10078654 21.0: 10078655 

22.0: 10078619 23.0-23.5: 10078621 24.0-24.5: 10078623 25.0-25.5: 10078625 

26.0-26.5: 10078628 27.0-27.5: 10078630 28.0-28.5: 10078632 29.0-29.5: 10078635 

30.0-30.5: 10078637 31.0-31.5: 10078639 32.0-32.5: 10078642 33.0-33.5: 10078644 

$ 5.50 

1X2 Therm-ic Insoles 

22.0: 55473119 23.0-23.5: 55473121 24.0-24.5: 55473123 25.0-25.5: 55473125 

26.0-26.5: 55473128 27.0-27.5: 55473130 

$ 15.00 

1X2 Footbed: Standard (black) 

24.0-24.5: 88164023 25.0-25.5: 88164025 26.0-26.5: 88164028 

27.0-27.5: 88164030 28.0-28.5: 88164032 29.0-29.5: 88164035 

$ 12.00 

1X2 

Footbed: Performa Prolink+Sport • Evolution 

2 • Verse • Ellipse • Performa 

22.0-23.5: 489965 24.0-25.5: 489966 

26.0-27.5: 489967 28.0-29.5: 489968 

30.0-33.5: 78592037 

$ 12.00 

$ 6.00 

1X4 

Sealing gaskets 

Mission, Divine 

22.0-27.5: 12002101 28.0-31.5: 12002201 $ 2.50 

1X4 

Sealing gaskets 

Impact Idol 

22.0-25.5: 55472301 

26.0-31.5: 55473001 

$ 8.00 

$ 8.00 

1X2 Lower leg strap 35 mm (black/red) 

22.0-25.5: 10078701 

26.0-33.5: 10078801 

$ 12.00 

1X8 Lateral cap Y/C (grey) 78591901 $ 5.00 

1X4 

innerboot adaptation / Bootfitting 

Course Ellipse: Canting rivet 78399001 

1X4 Course X2: Canting screw 78399101 $ 14.00 

1X4 X-Wave • Impact • Mission RS • Divine RS • Falcon • Instinct: Canting rivets 78399201 $ 8.00 

1X20 Toothed nut M4 & screw 10078901 $ 10.00 

1X10 Screw + insert (teeth + 3D plate) 12002301 $ 2.50 

1X2 Pre-cut foam sheet (4mm) 10079101 $ 35.00 

1X2 

Prolink Forward Lean Adjustment Wedge : 

(All products Course • Performa Prolink) (black) 

22.0-25.5: 882397 

26.0-30.0: 882398 

$ 7.00 

$ 7.00 

1X2 Prolink innerboot adaptation plate 

Bootsole + Screws 

24.0-25.5: 882399 

26.0-30.0: 882400 

$ 7.00 

$ 7.00 

1X2 Back: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio 440 05 • Elios • Charm 8 mm / 22.0-33.5: 487450 $ 6.00 

1X2 

Front: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio • Performa 04 • 

Verse 04 • Ellipse 04 

8 mm / 22.0-25.5: 489617 

8 mm / 26.0-33.5: 489618 

$ 8.00 

$ 8.00 

1X2 

Walkadin Back: Verse • Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony • 

Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine 

12 mm / 22.0-33.5: 55473201 $ 8.00 

Walkadin Front: Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony • Symbio 440 05 • 

12 mm / 22.0-25.5: 53527601 $ 8.00 

1X2 Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS • 

SPK • Elios • Charm 

12 mm / 26.0-33.5: 53527701 $ 8.00 

Alpine Pad Front: Quest (grey/black) 12002401 $ 4.00 

1X2 

Alpine Pad Back: 

Quest • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS (black/grey) 

10079001 $ 15.00 

1X2 

Back: W-Wave (M&W) • Course XR Japon • Course GT • Course T • 1080 • 1080 Japon 

• Course 100 • 90 • 80 • 70 

881642 $ 5.00 

1X2 Evolution2 490353 $ 6.00 

1X2 Back: Team 3.0 • team 3.5 489763 $ 5.00 

1X2 Back: 12 Mini • 15 Mini 16.0-17.0: 488030 $ 4.00 

1X2 Front: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21) 882381 $ 6.00 

1X2 Back: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21) 882382 $ 6.00 


$ 8.00

Spare partS 

nordic 

alPIne Boots > 79 

1X1 

laces 

Quickfit 

(see page 84: ref 86065701 Footwear) 

95 cm: 86065701 

1X10 Quickfit Holder 10108001 

1X2 Zip 

(black): 10108101 

(grey): 10108201 

1X2 Lace 10107201 

1X2 Strap Velcro 25823701 

$ 6.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 7.00 

1X5 

rivet 

Carbon Pro • Racing Skate 9 • Active 9 Skate • Vitane 9 Skate 10106801 $ 4.00 

1X5 861 • Active 8 Skate CL • Vitane 8 Skate CL • Equipe Combi 10109201 $ 4.00 

1X5 Nail Active 08 Black 

insoles 

12011801 $ 2.00 

9K: 25823652 10K: 25823608 11K: 25823610 12K: 25823612 13K: 25823654 $ 8.00 

1X2 Durafresh 5 mm 

Screw chart 

1: 25823616 2: 25823617 3: 25823656 4: 25823621 5: 25823623 

6: 25823625 7: 25823627 8: 25823629 9: 25823631 10: 25823633 

11: 25823635 12: 25823637 13: 25823639 14: 25823641 

$ 8.00 

1X100 Profil Equipe Junior Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 78859901 $ 19.00 

Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Profil Active SC 

1X100 

SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2 

Ø 6,3 / 17,7: 890111 $ 14.00 

1X100 SNS X Adventure Raid 

SNS X Adventure Raid 

Pilot Equipe Skate • SNS X Adv Access • Profil Auto Men/ Women 

Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/ Women 

Ø 6,3 / 26: F872020 $ 14.00 

1X100 Plaque SPS Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/Women 

Pilot Equipe Classic 

Profil Equipe Skate - Profil Equipe Classic - Profil Active SC 

SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2 

Profil Auto JR 

Pilot Equipe Classic 

Ø 6,3 / 19,5: 890109 $ 13.00 

1X100 Profil Snow/Monster 

Pilot Sport Junior - Pilot Junior 

Profil Equipe JR 

Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 890112 $ 13.00 

Plaque SPS Pilot Junior Ø 6,3 / 12: 108797 $ 10.00 

1X50 Profil Auto Junior (Skis < 140) Ø 5,4 / 10: 000909 $ 13.00 

1X10 Vis Réglage / Adjustment screw • Equipe Classic Pilot 

pull tab 

55454101 $ 3.00 

1X10 Pilot Equipe Skate - Pilot Active Skate (yellow): 10106201 $ 12.00 

1X10 

plugs 

Pilot Equipe Skate • Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Pilot Active Skate • Profil Auto (Men/ 

women/Junior) • Profil Active SC • SNS X adventure Raid+Access 

cap 

890094 

1X10 Profil Equipe Classic • Profil Equipe skate • Profil Active SC 10102101 

1X1 Screw cap Pilot équipe Classic 55454201 

1X1 Screw cap Pilot sport 55454301 


$ 6.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 3.00 

$ 3.00

Spare partS 

1X2 

1X2 

flexor 

Profil Equipe Skate 

skI nordIQue > 80 

115: (red) 10104201 

125: (red) 10104301 

Profil Equipe Classic 85: (yellow) 10102201 

Profil Active SC 105: (grey) 10105101 

Profil Auto Men 105: (black) 10104801 

Profil Auto Women 95: (grey) 10104901 

Profil Auto Junior Junior: (yellow) 10105001 

1X2 SNS X Adventure Raid 185: (grey) 10104401 

ridge plate 

1X2 Ridge Plate Pilot Skate 78846901 

1X2 Profil Equipe 78847201 

1X2 Ridge plate Profil Auto Universal 78847101 

1X1 S/E Plate Pilot Equipe Classic 55454001 

1X1 SPS Plate 25823501 

Steel link 

1X2 Steel link: Pilot 78847301 

Service products 

1X1 Jig • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure 891000 

1X4 Reversible jig pads • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure 10106401 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 18.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 65.00 

$ 15.00 

1X5 Drill bit - Profil Automatique Junior Ø 3,6 x L 8 mm: 000814 $ 78.00 

1X1 Drill bit Ø 3,6 x L 15 mm: 10105201 $ 30.00 

1X1 Special repair plug drill bit 10105301 $ 32.00 

1X100 Repair plugs 000846 

1X1 6 face posidrive bit 78504801 

Sticker Pilot Equipe 55453901 


$ 16.00 

$ 16.00 

$ 5.00

Spare partS 

SnoWBoard BoardS 

Snowboard tip protector 

nordIc > 81 

1X1 Rental boards (black) 55473801 

SnoWBoard BindingS 

No spare parts for S PRO TEAM bindings 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

transmission pads 

Base Pad all SP models (khaki/black) S: 55473954 M/L: 55473955 

Base Pad all SPX models (black) S: 78858454 M: 78858456 L: 78858458 

Base Pad all Force & Grace models (black) S: 78836255 L: 78836258 

Base Front Pad Slasher: all Slasher models, Arcade, Stella, Celeste, Patriot S: 10832254 M/L: 10832257 

Base Pad all Relay models (black) Black: S: 53527254 M: 53527256 L: 53527258 

1X2 Cover disc Pad + Screw for transfer base: 

Black: S: 10832554 M: 10832556 L: 10832558 

L+R Transfer models 

4x4 disks 

White: S: 10834254 M: 10834256 L: 10834258 

1X8 Screw + washers for disk - All Models (except 98 Rental) 88999301 

1X2 6 holes Disk IMS + Screws + Washers - All Models (except 98 Rental & Speedfit) 

Straps 

78855401 

1X2 Toe Strap - All Models + M4 Toolfree 

S: (black) 12023654 M: (black) 12023656 L: (black) 12023658 

S: (white) 12023754 M: (white) 12023756 L: (white) 12023758 

1X2 Toe Adjuster - All S and SP Models (black) S: 53527454 M/L: 53527457 

1X2 Toe Adjuster - All SPX, Force, Grace & Relay Models (black) 

S: (black) 78563554 M/L: (black) 78563557 

S: (white) 10134054 M/L: (white) 10134057 

1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Relay and Slasher models (black) 78839301 

$ 8.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 30.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 4,00 

$ 18.00 

$ 4,00 

$ 4,00 

$ 5.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 3.50 

$ 4.00 

$ 2.50 

$ 3.00 

1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Force and Grace models (white) 53527501 $ 5.00 

1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06- (black) S/M: 78374919 L: 78374921 $ 5.00 

1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06+ (black) S/M: 78837054 L: 78837057 $ 7.00 

1X2 

S/M: (black) 12023855 L: (black) 12023858 

Narrow Toe Sawblade 19 mm + Holding fast fit pin: All models with narrow buckle 10+ 

S/M: (white) 12024055 L: (white) 12024058 

$ 2.00 

$ 2.00 

1X2 Toe Sawblade 24 mm + Holding fast fit: All Models 09- except SP models. (black) 

S/M: (black) 78837155 L: (black) 78837158 

S/M: (white) 10134155 L: (white) 10134158 

$ 12.00 

$ 2.50 

1X2 Alu TOE Buckle All Models 09- 78855301 $ 25.00 

1X2 Alu ANKLE Buckle All Models 09- 78836901 

1X2 

TOE ratchet viper for sawblade 19 mm 

width All Models 10+ 

12024101 

1X2 ANKLE buckle viper & screw All Models 10+ 12024301 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

Ankle Strap All Relay Models (black) 

Ankle Strap All Relay Models (white) 

Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (black) 

Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (white) 

Cored Out Ankle Strap 

All models except Relay. 

1X2 Ankle Sawblade + Ring + Toothed Nut M5 All Models 


$ 28.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 7.00 

145 mm / S/M: 99494055 $ 25.00 

165 mm / L: 78560054 $ 33.00 

145 mm / S/M: 99494155 $ 25.00 

165 mm / L: 78838755 $ 40.00 

165 mm / S: 78560054 $ 33.00 

185 mm / M/L: 78560057 $ 33.00 

165 mm / S: 78838755 $ 40.00 

185 mm / M/L: 78838758 $ 40.00 

(black) 165 mm / S: 12024455 $ 10.00 

(black) 185 mm / M/L: 12024458 $ 10.00 

(white) 165 mm / S: 12024555 $ 10.00 

(white) 185 mm / M/L: 12024558 $ 10.00 

(black) 78839201 $ 4.00 

(white) 10131401 $ 2.50

Spare partS 

1X2 Ankle Adjustment Kit Ring + Toolfree Adjuster M4 + Tooth Nut All models 

snowBoard BIndIngs > 82 

(black) 12024601 

(white) 12024701 

1X2 Aesthetic Strap Washer + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw outside (white) 78839101 

1X2 Aesthetic Strap Nut + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw inside 99493801 

1X4 

Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Toe/Ankle) All SP models 889905 

Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Ankle) All SPX models 88999701 

1X4 Strap Kit (screw + nut) - (Ankle) All Force & Grace models . 78836801 

Spoilers • Highback 

1X2 Highback Rotation Screw: All Relay models 78839401 

1X2 Toolfree FWL Adjuster: All models (grey) 78837501 

1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All W models except Relay (white) S/M: 78839755 

1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All models except Relay S/M: 78839855 L: 78839858 

1X2 FWL Adjuster: Only Force model (grey) 99493901 

1X2 FWL Adjuster: All models 06- except Force & Relay (black) 78857701 

1X2 Length Base Adjustment Kit: All Force & Grace models (black) 78858001 

Rental • Speedfit / Fastec 

1X2 Disk: Speedfit & Fastec models 78333801 Aftermarket 

1X8 Screw 4X4 M6X20: Speedfit & Fastec models 78620501 

Rental • Speedfit 

1X2 Ankle Strap 78697201 

1X2 Aluminum Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8 12025801 

1X2 Plastic Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8 78619001 

1X2 Quick cricket: Tool free ankle strap adjustment 78619101 

1X2 TOE: Sawblade Fast Fit Tooth Straps 9,5 mm hole: 78619201 

1X2 ANKLE: Sawblade straps for bolt gard 05+ 9,5 mm hole: 78619301 

1X2 Holding Fast Fit: Toestrap snap support easy base 78619401 

1X2 Toestrap L/XL . (S/M couper 1 trou pour petite taille) 78619559 

1X2 Heelcup lever 78620601 

1X4 Highback screw + bush + nut M6 . 78620701 

1X2 Forward lean screw + washer + savenut M5 X 10 78620901 

1X1 Highback + FWL adjuster + screw 10- S/M: 78621101 

1X1 Highback Cored Out + FWL adjuster + screw 10+ L/XL, S/M: 12026601 

1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- S/M: 78621301 

1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- L/XL: 78621401 

1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- L/XL, S/M: 12026901 

1X2 

L&R 

Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws 78840001 

1X6 Plug for base plate 12027401 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

Front Pad + Screws S/M: 10834655 M/L: 10834658 

Rental • Fastec 

Kit Ankle strap Fastec 10835401 

1X2 Kit Toe strap Fastec 10835501 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

1X2 

L+R 

Toe strap adjuster 10835601 

Ankle strap adjuster ( special nut, screw M5x8, safety washer,connection nut) 10835701 

ARS Autorelease buckles KIT ( M5x8 screw ,Buckle cam, Nut M5, safety washer) 10835801 

Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws S/M M/L: 10835955 L/XL: 10835957 


$ 2.50 

$ 2.50 

$ 3.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 3.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 16.50 

$ 13.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 30.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 22.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 15.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 16.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 20.00 

$ 7.00 

$ 4,00 

$ 15,00 

$ 15,00 

$ 4,00 

$ 4,00 

$ 10,00 

$ 20,00

Spare partS 

SnoWBoard BootS 

1X2 

1X2 

liners 

FULL CUSTOM FIT Pro - 

All Models Except Talapus & F models 

CUSTOM FIT - 

All Models Except Talapus & F models 

inner Soles 

1X2 All models except Talapus 

23.0-23.5: 78835921 24.0-24.5: 78835923 25.0-25.5: 78835925 

26.0-26.5: 78835928 27.0-27.5: 78835930 28.0-28.5: 78835932 $ 122.00 

29.0-29.5: 78835935 30.0-30.5: 78835937 

23.0-23.5: 78836021 24.0-24.5: 78836023 25.0-25.5: 78836025 

26.0-26.5: 78836028 27.0-27.5: 78836030 28.0-28.5: 78836032 

29.0-29.5: 78836035 30.0-30.5: 78836037 

23.0: 78611721 23.5: 78611722 24.0: 78611723 24.5: 78611724 

25.0: 78611725 25.5: 78611726 26.0: 78611728 26.5: 78611729 

27.0: 78611730 27.5: 78611731 28.0: 78611732 28.5: 78611733 

29.0: 78611735 29.5: 78611736 30.0: 78611737 30.5: 78611738 

laces 

1X2 Power Lace handle (All models) with Power Lace 78396101 

1X2 Lace Pulley (All models) with SPL lace 10836201 

1X2 Combo closed + lace: for SPL models only 10836101 

1X2 Minicombo Main Part 09- All models except Kamooks and Talapus 99494501 

1X2 Minicombo Main Part 10+ All models except Kamooks and Talapus 12038601 

1X2 Power Lace Locker (All models) 78396201 

1X2 LINER Kevlar Lace Locker (All models) 78396301 

1X4 Open Top Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Lace hook or Top Block 78396501 

1X4 Closed Bottom Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Eyestack Block 78396601 

1X2 Open Eyestay block (Fusion models only) 19578501 

1X2 Closed Eyestay block (Fusion models only) 19578601 

1X8 Open Top Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+ 10837301 

1X4 Closed Eyestay / Bottom Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+ 10837101 

1X2 Metal hook 10837401 

1X2 Lace (all Power Lace models) 

(black) 25.5: 78396026 28.5: 78396733 31.5: 78396841 

(black) 225 cm / 31.5: 12038941 

(white) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039041 

(dark brown) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039141 

(red) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039241 

1X1 (All models) Liner kevlar lace (black) 25 m 78396401 

1X2 Big Speed Lace Locker + Lace 78836101 

1X2 Speed Lace Locker + Lace 88935501 

1X2 New combo («tongue lace locker with springs») 99494701 

1X2 BOA coiler reel • O6 (B521) All BOA models 06- 19578701 

1X2 BOA coiler reel • H2 (B779B) All BOA models 10+ 12038701 

1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models 130 cm / 22.0-26.5: 19578801 

1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models 10+ 140 cm / 27.0-31.5: 12039301 


snowBoard BIndIngs > 83 

$ 74.00 

$ 11.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 3,00 

$ 2,00 

$ 7.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 5.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4.00 

$ 4,00 

$ 4,00 

$ 2,00 

$ 2.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 2.00 

$ 17.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 2.50 

$ 4.00 

$ 40.00 

$ 18.00 

$ 14.00 

$ 4.00

Spare partS 

footWear 

footwear > 84 

1X2 

laces 

Mountain Lace (grey) 

1,60 m: 86065401 1,80 m: 86065501 

2,00 m: 86065601 

1X2 

Junior lace (black) 

Footwear lace 

1,00 m: 86065101 

(black) 1,30 m: 86065201 (grey) 1,30 m: 86065301 

1X2 Quick Lace Kit 

(black): 86065701 

(grey): 86065801 

1X2 Quick Lace Small Kit 

(black): 12012301 

(grey): 12012401 

Poulies • Lace Hooks & Loops 

1X10 Plastic (black) 86067301 

1X10 Lace Hook 86067401 

inner Soles 

1X2 EVA insoles decut & perforated 

1X2 Molded Felt Sockliner 


3,5/4: 86065921 4,5/5: 86065923 5,5/6: 86065925 6,5/7: 86065927 

7,5/8: 86065929 8,5/9: 86065931 9,5/10: 86065933 10,5/11: 86065935 

11,5/12: 86065937 12,5/13: 86065939 

3,5: 86068220 4,0: 86068221 4,5: 86068222 5,0: 86068223 5,5: 86068224 

6,0: 86068225 6,5: 86068226 7,0: 86068227 7,5: 86068228 8,0: 86068229 

8,5: 86068230 9,0: 86068231 9,5: 86068232 10,0: 86068233 10,5: 86068234 

11,0: 86068235 11,5: 86068236 12,0: 86068237 12,5: 86068238 

13,0: 86068239 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 6.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 4.50 

$ 4.50 

$ 6.00 

$ 8.00 

$ 10.00 

$ 14.00

Warranty 

Salomon retail Binding limited Warranty 

replacement procedures 

Step one. Verify by customer receipt or production code that the defective 

component is under warranty. (Warranty claims should be handled through 

Authorized Dealers to ensure speed and accuracy of product replacement. 

Please do not refer a customer directly to Salomon.) 

Step two: Call customer service for return authorization number. 

(There is no longer an express warranty form.) 

Step three: Return the defective set to Salomon with the return authorization 

number clearly printed on the outside of the package. Return the entire set, 

unless otherwise instructed by customer service. 

Ship the package freight pre-paid to: 

uSa canada 

Salomon Service Center Salomon Canada Sports 

Building 5X, Bay 6 Division of Amer Sports Canada Inc. 

710 West Amidan Drive 3545 Thimens Blvd. 

Ogden, UT 84404 Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4R 1V5 

Upon a dealer’s request to Customer Service, a warranty replacement component 

can be shipped in advance to the dealer before it is inspected at Salomon’s 

Service Center. Salomon will invoice the dealer for the replacement component 

and issue a credit when the defective component is received and verified. If the 

defective component exchanged for the advance replacement is not received 

within 45 days from the issue of the Return Authorization Number, or proves 

not to be defective, no credit will be issued for the replacement product. 

Step four: Salomon will ship the replacement product to the dealer, surface 

freight pre-paid, after verification of the defect. 

Salomon Service center 

In the event an unusual situation is encountered or a technical question arises 

please call the Salomon Service Center at: 

uSa 1-800-654-2668 

can 1-800-361-3398 ext. 1142 

warranty > 85 

Salomon Retail Alpine Bindings are covered under warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing for a period of five years from their date of purchase to the 

original customer. In the absence of proof-of-purchase, this warranty period will be five years from date of manufacture of the product as indicated by production code. This 

warranty only covers the defective component, not the full pair or set, i.e., left toe piece, brake, right heel, etc. Abuse and normal wear are not covered by this warranty. 

Salomon alpine Skis, Snowblade & Boot Warranty 

Salomon alpine skis, Snowblade and 

boots are warranted for a period of 

2 years from date of original purchase. 

To determine the period covered by the 

warranty, the customer has to show the 

sales receipt. 

The Salomon Snowblade warranty can 

only function if the customer presents 

the Snowblade unit to the dealer as it 

was sold (ski and binding). If not, the 

warranty cannot be honored. 

Salomon pilot set warranty 

The skis are covered for 2 years from 

the date of original purchase. 

The bindings are covered by a 5 years 

warranty from the date of original 

purchase. 

Ski: if there is a problem that is 

covered by the warranty (breakage, 

pulled edge…) that occurs during the 

warranty period (2 years), Salomon will 

replace either the Ski + Binding unit 

or the Ski only at our discretion. 

Binding: if there is a problem that 

is covered by the Salomon warranty 

(breakage, binding pulled-out…) that 

occurs during the warranty period 

(5 years), Salomon will replace the 

Binding only, except if the damage concerns 

the brake or the AFD plate. In this 

case, Salomon will replace the defective 

part(s) with spare parts. 

Salomon’s only liability as regards this 

warranty will be to repair or replace the 

Salomon helmet & alpine pole Warranty 

Salomon helmets and poles are guaranteed 

against defects in materials and 

manufacturing for a period of one year 

from their date of purchase*. 

This warranty only covers the defective 

compo nents. Claims arising from improper 

storage of product, modification, 

abuse and normal wear are not covered 

by this warranty. This warranty applies 

only to products sold by an Authorized 

Salomon Dealer. For warranty service, 

present the defective helmet with the 

original sales receipt to your nearest 

Authorized Salomon Dealer. 

* This warranty may vary in some 

countries. 

Mechanical inspection failures 

Normal wear is expected with the use of a product. Should a component fail a 

mechanical inspection (measured release values that fall outside the “In-Use 

Range”) within its warranty period, include the following information with the 

returned component. 

• Description of inspection that the component failed. 

• Brand of test device and date of most recent calibration. 

• Skier Code and visual indicator setting. 

• Boot brand, model and sole length. 

• All measured release values and name of the technician. 

Every Salomon binding component is precision tested to assure its accuracy 

during manufacture. It is extremely rare that a component would be out of 

calibration unless there is visible damage. All bindings returned due to mechanical 

testing failures are inspected. No replacement product will be issued 

unless all required information is included with the product. 

product age Verification 

Verification that the product is within the warranty period can be made in 

the following two ways: 

1. Customer receipt indicating product was purchased within the last five years. 

2. Component production code* indicating manufacture of product within last five 

years. 

note 

* All Salomon binding components are stamped with a two- or three-digit code upon their 

final production to indicate month and year of production. Normally, codes are a letter 

followed by a number, with the letter indicating month of produc tion. Each number corresponds 

to the actual year of production, i.e., 3 would indicate 2003, 4 would indicate 

2004, etc. To simplify the warranty process, product age is determined by the year of 

production only. Retail bindings with a production code indicating that the bindings were 

manufac tured in 2006 (e.g., A6, M6) will be warranted until the end of the 2010/2011 ski 

season. Production codes are stamped in various places on all binding components. 

defective product with a model or pair 

within the limits of available stock. 

These warranties cover skis, Snowblade, 

bindings against manufacturing defects. 

However, these warranties do not 

cover damage resulting from transport, 

handling, storage, failure by the cli- 

ent to follow the instructions for use, 

modification of the product or normal 

wear and tear. 

In case of damage to a product caused 

by an accident or misuse, please consult 

Salomon Customer Service for advice 

on possible repair or replacement. 

Ski problems not covered by the warranty 

problems Solutions 

Bent skis Contact subsidiary for more information 

top surface Can be repaired 

tip protector Can be repaired with spare parts 

tail protector Cannot be repaired 

running surface Can be repaired 

Binding pull-out Can be repaired with inserts 

pulled edge Can be repaired 

For all other problems, contact the subsidiary Customer Service. 

Salomon’s only liability regarding this 

warranty will be to repair or replace the 

defective product with a model in an 

available version. 

Warning: 

The Salomon helmets are designed only 

for the following activities: ski, snowboard 

and skiboard (Snowblade®). 

They are not designed to be used on 

motorbikes or for other sports, mechanical 

or not. 

The Alpine Salomon poles are designed 

for cross country or downhill skiing only, 

except for the adjustable poles that can 

be used for downhill skiing and hiking.

Salomon u.S.a. 

2030 LINCOLN AvE. 

OGDEN, UT 84401 U.S.A. 

1 (800) 225-6850 

www.salomoncertification.com 

Salomon canada Sports 

2700 14Th AvE UNIT 1-4 

MARKhAM, ON L3R 0J1 

www.salomonhookup.ca 

SalomonSports.com 

Printed in Canada

SHOP PRACTICES - Salomon Certification

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?